D89946GC10 SG

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Oracle Flash Storage System:
FS1 Administration for SAN
R6.x
Student Guide
D89946GC10
Edition 1.0 | September 2015 | D92661
Learn more from Oracle University at oracle.com/education/
Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or it affiliates. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. You may
copy and print this document solely for your own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or
altered in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you may not use, share, download,
upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in
part without the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you find any problems in the document,
please report them in writing to: Oracle University, 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This
document is not warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using the documentation on behalf of the
United States Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or disclose these training materials are
restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract. s a
) ha
om
Trademark Notice
c
respective owners. i c es ide
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Contents
I Oracle Flash Storage System

Course Goals I-2
Course Agenda I-3
Topics Not Covered in This Course I-4
Resources for the Oracle Flash Storage System I-5
How to Use the Course Materials I-6
Conventions I-7 s a
Typographical Conventions I-9 ) ha
Lab Environment: Ethernet I-10 c om
Lab Environment: SAN Fabric I-11 i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
1 Overview c s o den
Objectives 1-2 p ra Stu
Oracle Flash Storage System FS1 1-3
f i n o@ this
r r u e 1-5
uEvery System
s
FS1-2 Inclusive Software Ships with
e l fe Pluse t1-6
QoS o
gu cens1-7
Quality of Service: QoS and
m i
Automatic Intelligent
o ( Profiles
l e li 1-9
Management
Oracle FS1
f i n
Storage
uDomains: b Isolation Containers 1-10
aData
r r f e r
Fe rFS1-2
Storage
l a n sHardware: Building Blocks 1-11
g e Oracle
u Oracle -t FS1 Storage System 1-12
M i n o n
FS1 Management Features 1-13
Mobile Monitoring: Oracle FS Mobile for iPhone or Android Applications 1-14
Lesson Summary 1-15
2 Architecture
Objectives 2-2
QoS: Levels, I/O, and Cache Priority 2-3
Dynamic Quality of Service Through Entire Oracle FS System 2-4
QoS/QoS Plus: Auto-Tiering 2-5
Access Skew: Ratio Between Hot and Cold Data 2-6
I/O Management with Oracle FS1 2-8
Drive Groups 2-9
RAID Levels 2-10
FS1 Layout: SAS RAID 6/5S for Spinning Media 2-11
Layout of Strips with Rotating Hot Spare 2-12
Drive Loss Scenario: Drive Failure (1 of 5) 2-13
Drive Loss Scenario: Rebuild (2 of 5) 2-14
Drive Loss Scenario: Drive Replacement (3 of 5) 2-15
Drive Loss Scenario: Rebuild/Copyback (4 of 5) 2-16

Drive Loss Scenario: Zero Spares (5 of 5) 2-17
Internal Tiers Include RAID Level Admins/users only see four tiers 2-18
RAID Function Enhancement in Release 6.2 2-19
Thin Provisioning 2-22
Virtual Storage Machines: Storage Domains Containers 2-23
Storage Profiles: Tuned for Specific Applications 2-25
Storage Profiles: OLTP Example 2-26
s a
Summary 2-28
) ha
c om
3 System Management
i c es ide
Objectives 3-2
- s erv t Gu
References 3-3
c s o den
Management and Administrative Interfaces 3-4 p ra Stu
FS Web Portal 3-5
f i n o@ this
Browser Access to the FS Web Portal
r r u 3-6 use
Recent Information and System
e l feStatuse to3-7
Recent Alerts and System
m i gu Events
c e ns3-8
o ( e li3-9
Documentation
f i n Download
a b l
r r u
Downloadable
f r
Utility
e Software 3-10
e s
F ran the Windows GUI 3-11
l Downloading
g u e -t
M i n o n
Downloading the Windows CLI 3-12
GUI Installation: Windows .msi 3-13
Java Runtime Environment (JRE) GUI .zip and .tar 3-15
System Manager 3-16
User Accounts 3-17
Password Protection 3-18
Logging In to an FS System Manager Using FS System Manager 3-19
GUI: Pilot Mismatch 3-20
Default Landing Page 3-21
Navigation 3-22
Menu Bar 3-23
Sortable, Drillable Information 3-25
Online Context-Sensitive Help 3-26
Status Bar 3-27
Viewing Active Sessions 3-29
Dashboard 3-30
Tab Navigation: System Tab 3-31
Tab Navigation: SAN Tab 3-32
Tab Navigation: Support Tab 3-33
Initial Settings 3-34
Modify Asset Information 3-35

Modify Network Settings 3-36
Modify Network Settings: Interfaces 3-37
Modify Network Settings: Notification 3-38
Settings for ASR: Call-Home 3-39
Create Administrator Account 3-40
Modify Security Settings 3-41
Modify System Time 3-42
s a
Storage Profiles 3-43
) ha
Storage Profiles: View Storage Profile 3-45
c om
Storage Profiles: Create Storage Profile 3-46
i c es ide
Volume Groups 3-47
- s erv t Gu
Managing Volume Groups 3-49
c s o den
Assigning Volumes to a Volume Group 3-50 p ra Stu
Storage Domains 3-51
f i n o@ this
r r u u s
Storage Domains: Creating a Storage Domain 3-53 e
e l fe e to
Adding Drive Groups to a Storage Domain 3-55
i gu cens
Modifying a Storage Domain 3-56
m
o ( e li
f i a b l
Removing Drive Groups from a Storage Domain 3-57
n
u
rr sfer
Drive Group: Exclusion in Progress 3-58
F e
u e l
- t r an
Alerts and Events 3-59
Mig non
Alerts and Events: Status Summary 3-60
Alerts and Events: System Alerts 3-61
Alerts and Events: Event Log 3-62
Lesson Summary 3-63
Practice 3-66
4 SAN Provisioning
Objectives 4-2
References 4-3
SAN: Overview and Features 4-4
SAN Overview: LUN Management 4-5
SAN Topologies 4-6
Asymmetric LUN Access 4-7
SAN Capabilities and Limits (per FS1 System) 4-8
Host Connectivity 4-9
Flash Storage Path Manager (FSPM) 4-10
Installing FSPM on Different Platforms 4-12
Where to Get FSPM 4-13
When to Install FSPM 4-14
Flash Storage Path Manager 4-15
Installing FSPM 4-16

Windows Installation of FSPM 4-17
Linux Installation of FSPM 4-18
Solaris Installation of FSPM 4-19
SAN Host Access on the FS1 System 4-20
Associate SAN Hosts Without FSPM 4-21
Verify Association 4-23
Provisioning Storage 4-24
s a
Before You Begin 4-25
) ha
LUN Provisioning Properties 4-26
c om
QoS Properties 4-27
i c es ide
Overall QoS Profile Effect 4-28
- s erv t Gu
Access Bias + I/O Bias 4-29
c s o den
QoS Changes and Data Migration 4-30 p ra Stu
Creating Single-Tier LUN 4-31
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
Creating Single-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 1) 4-32
e l fe e to
Creating Single-Tier LUN: Mapping Tab (Step 2) 4-34
i gu cens
Create Single-Tier LUN: Mapping Tab (Step 2) 4-35
m
o ( e li
f i a b l
Create Single-Tier LUN: Data Protection (Step 3) 4-36
n
u
rr sfer
Using Create LUN like selected 4-39
F e
u e l
- t r an
QoS Plus | Auto-Tier Impact 4-40
Mig non
Create Auto-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 1) 4-41
Create Auto-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 2) 4-42
Data Migration 4-43
Disabling Data Migration 4-44
Disabling Tier Reallocation 4-45
Customizing Auto-Tier Scans 4-46
Changing the Tiering on a LUN 4-47
Host Mapping 4-48
Visibility: Host-LUN Mapping or LUN-Host Mapping 4-49
Managing SAN Host Groups 4-50
Managing Host Groups 4-51
Configuring a SAN Host 4-52
Configuring a LUN on a Windows Host 4-53
Configuring a LUN on a UNIX Host 4-54
Data Protection Clone and Copy 4-55
SAN Clone and Copy 4-56
Managing Clone LUNs 4-57
Copy LUN (Volume Copy) 4-58
Restoring from a Clone 4-59
Growing a Clone or Copy 4-60
Lesson Summary 4-61

Practice 4-63
5 System Hardware
Objectives 5-2
References 5-3
Hardware Architecture 5-4
Oracle Rack 5-5
s a
FS1-2 in Oracle Racks 5-6
) ha
Component Placement 5-7
c om
FS1 Pilots 5-8
i c es ide
FS1-2 Pilot: Overview 5-9
- s erv t Gu
FS1-2 Pilot Clustering 5-10
c s o den
p ra Stu
FS1-2 Pilot: Front and Back Images of the X4-2 5-11
f i n o@ this
FS1-2 Pilot: Front and Back Images of the X5-2 5-12
r r u
FS1-2 Pilot Racking and Cabling 5-13
u s e
FS1 Controllers 5-14
e l fe e to
i gu cens
FS1-2 Controller: Overview 5-15
m
o ( e li
f i a b l
FS1-2 Controllers Fail Over Fail Back (FOFB) 5-16
n
u
rr sfer
FS1-2 Controller 5-17
F e
u e l
- t r an
FS Controller: SAS HBA Configuration 5-18
Mig non
Non-Volatile DIMM + Energy Storage Module 5-19
Mirrored Writes Using NVDIMMs 5-20
FS1 Controller Cabling 5-21
FS1 Drive Enclosures 5-22
Drive Enclosure (DE): Overview 5-23
Performance Enclosure (2U Chassis e/w 2.5 form factor drives) 5-24
Capacity Enclosure (4U Chassis with 3.5-Inch Form factor Drives) 5-25
Enclosure: Back Sides 5-26
Drive Enclosure Rack Placement and Growth 5-27
Drive Enclosure Strings and Cabling Basic guidelines 5-28
One DE String 5-29
Two DE Strings 5-30
Six DE Strings 5-31
Drive Enclosure Expansion 5-32
Planning Steps for Adding Drive Enclosures 5-33
Additional Planning Steps for Adding Drive Enclosures 5-34
Drive Enclosure Unpacking 5-35
Workflow for Installing New Drive Enclosures 5-36
Drive Enclosure Add Order: Performance Model 5-37
Drive Enclosure Chassis IDs 5-38
Expansion Label Kit 5-39

Preparing the FS1 for Added DEs 5-40
Guided Maintenance Add DE Tool (R6.2) 5-41
Add Drive Enclosure: Select the Drive Enclosure Type 5-42
Add Drive Enclosure: Ready to Begin 5-43
Add Drive Enclosure: Cable the New Drive Enclosure 5-44
Adding SSDs to a Drive Enclosure 5-45
Power and PDUs 5-46
s a
Single-Phase PDU 5-47
) ha
Single-Phase PDU Cabling 5-48
c om
Lesson Summary 5-49
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
6 Monitoring and Maintenance
c s o den
Objectives 6-2 p ra Stu
References 6-3
f i n o@ this
FS1-2 Monitoring Tools 6-4
r r u u s e
MaxMan 6-5
e l fe e to
Oracle MaxMan: Overview
m i gu c6-6ens
Downloading o ( MaxMan
Oracle
l e li 6-7
i n
ufInstallation b
a(Windows
e r
MaxMan r f e r .msi) 6-8
F raMaxMan
l Starting n s 6-11
u e t
- MaxMan 6-12
Mig non
Navigating
Summary Page 6-13
Oracle Axiom Systems Page 6-14
Oracle FS Systems Page 6-15
System Alerts Page 6-16
Recent Events Page 6-17
Software Modules Page 6-18
Where to Start: Create a List 6-19
Managing Lists 6-20
Opening an Existing List 6-21
Managing a Monitored System 6-22
Statistics and Trending 6-23
Statistics and Trending: Overview 6-24
Storage Performance Statistical Data Terminology 6-25
LUN Statistics and Trending 6-26
Controller Protocol Statistics and Trending 6-27
Drive Group Statistics 6-28
CPU Statistics 6-29
Storage Domain Reports 6-30
Storage Domain Effectiveness Report 6-31
Storage Domain: Auto-Tier Graphs 6-32

Storage Domain: Storage Allocation Details 6-33
System Alerts and Events 6-34
Managing System Alerts 6-35
System Alerts 6-36
Viewing Details on Alerts 6-37
Alert Messages at Login 6-38
Alert Panels Displayed at Login: Examples 6-39
s a
System Events 6-40
) ha
Viewing Events 6-42
c om
Filtering Events (1 of 2) 6-43
i c es ide
Filtering Events (2 of 2) 6-44
- s erv t Gu
Creating Event Notifications 6-45
c s o den
Reports 6-46 p ra Stu
Reports: Overview 6-47
f i n o@ this
Generating a Report 6-48
r r u u s e
Downloading a Report 6-49
e l fe e to
i
Viewing a Report 6-50
m gu cens
o ( e li
f i a b l
Creating Report Schedules 6-51
n
u
rr sfer
System Logs 6-52
F e
u e l
- t r an
Oracle FS System Diagnostics 6-53
Mig non
Collecting System Information: Logs (1 of 2) 6-54
Collecting System Information (2 of 2) 6-56
Sending an Existing Bundle 6-57
System Status and Guided Maintenance 6-58
Guided Maintenance: Overview 6-59
Status of System: Dashboard 6-60
System Status Icon 6-61
Status of System: Hardware Status Icon 6-62
Status of System: Hardware Menu 6-63
Entering Guided Maintenance 6-64
Guided Maintenance Step 1: Introduction 6-65
Step 2: Identify Hardware 6-66
Step 3: Identify Hardware 6-67
Step 4: Replace Hardware 6-68
Step 5: Verify Replacement Successful 6-69
Verifying the Status of the Replaced Drive 6-70
Health Status 6-71
Software Updates 6-72
FS1-2 Software Update Process 6-73
Software Patch Categories: Access via MOS 6-75
Downloading a New Version 6-76

Confirming Release and Classification 6-77
Patch Read Me and Download 6-78
Patch Release Notes 6-79
Compatibility Matrix 6-80
Package Naming Conventions 6-82
Verifying the Current Version 6-84
FS1-2 System Updates: Staging the Software 6-85
s a
FS1-2 System Updates: Verifying the Staged Software 6-86
) ha
FS1-2 System Updates: Initiating the Update 6-87
c om
FS1-2 System Update Software Dialog Box 6-88
i c es ide
FS1-2 System Updates: Validating the Update 6-89
- s erv t Gu
SNMP Traps 6-90
c s o den
Sending SNMP Traps 6-91 p ra Stu
Lesson Summary 6-93
f i n o@ this
Practice 6-95
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
7 Utilities
m i gu cens
o ( e li
Objectives 7-2
f i n a b l
u r
rr sfeInterfaces
References 7-3
l F e n
Command-Line Client-Based Utilities 7-4
u e t r
- 7-5a
Mig non
FSCLI
FSCLI: Overview 7-6
Downloading the FSCLI Software 7-7
Extracting the FSCLI 7-8
FSCLI Command: Overview 7-9
FSCLI Help 7-10
fscli Commands 7-11
Logging In to FS1-2 by Using FSCLI 7-12
fscli Command -help: Example 7-13
Ending an FSCLI Session 7-14
Command Example system command 7-15
Command Example account command 7-16
Command Example pilot command 7-17
Command Example Physically Identify Controller 1 7-18
Command Example Physically Identify Enclosure 1 7-21
Topology 7-23
Validating the FS1-2 Topology 7-24
FS Statistics Tool 7-26
Oracle FS System Statistics: Overview 7-27
Statistics Tools: Overview 7-28
System Statistics Process: Overview 7-29

Downloading the Oracle FS Statistics Tools (Step 1) 7-30
Extracting the Statistics Tools from the Archive (Step 1) 7-31
Collecting and Downloading System Information (Steps 2 and 3) 7-32
Alternative Download of System Information (Step 3) 7-34
Statistics Bundle (Step 4): Extracting First Pass 7-35
Statistics Bundle (Step 4): Extracting Second Pass 7-36
Statistics Bundle (Step 4) Extracting 3rd Pass 7-37
s a
Running the Statistics Parser (Step 5) 7-38
) ha
Running the Statistics Formatter (Step 6) 7-40
c om
Analysis (Step 7) Viewing .csv file in MS Excel 7-42
i c es ide
Sample of Formatted Statistics (Step 7) 7-43
- s erv t Gu
Statistics Grouping 7-44
c s o den
Statistics Definitions 7-45 p ra Stu
FS Statistics Help via the h Option 7-46
f i n o@ this
Lesson Summary 7-47
r r u u s e
Practice 7-50
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
A Lab Environment
f i n a b l
u fer
F err nDetails
B l Hardware s
i g - tra B-2
ue FS1nPilots
M no
FS1-2 Pilot Dimensions and Weight B-3
FS1-2 Pilot: Overview B-4
FS1-2 Pilot Clustering B-5
FS1-2 Pilot: Front and Back Images of the X4-2 B-6
FS1-2 Pilot: Front and Back Images of the X5-2 B-7
FS1-2 (X4-2) Pilot CRUs B-8
Pilot FRUs Versus CRUs (Oracle Server X4-2) B-9
Pilot FRUs Versus CRUs (Oracle Server X5-2) B-10
FS1-2 Pilot LEDs B-11
Pilot: ILOM Block Diagram B-13
FS1-2 Pilot Power B-14
FS1-2 Pilot with CMA Installed B-15
FS1 Controllers B-16
FS1-2 Controller Dimensions and Weight B-17
FS1-2 Controller Top View B-18
FS1-2 Controller: Rear Image B-19
Controller FRUs B-21
Controller CRUs B-22
FS1-2 Base Model NVDIMM and DIMM Locations B-23
FS1-2 Performance Model NVDIMM and DIMM Locations B-24

FS1-2 NVDIMM Connection to Midplane B-25
FS1-2 NVDIMM Connection with Air Duct Removed B-26
FS1-2 Controller Energy Storage Module LEDs B-27
FS1-2 Controller Front Panel LEDs B-28
FS1-2 Controller Rear Panel LEDs B-30
FS1-2 Controller PCIe Card LEDs B-32
Controller: ILOM Block Diagram B-33
s a
FS1-2 Controller Power B-34
) ha
FS1-2 Controller with CMA Installed B-35
c om
FS1 Drive Enclosures B-36
i c es ide
Drive Enclosure Add Sequence: Example B-37
- s erv t Gu
Adding the Second Drive Enclosure B-38
c s o den
Adding the Third Drive Enclosure B-39 p ra Stu
Adding the Fourth Drive Enclosure B-40
f i n o@ this
r r u
Adding the Fifth Drive Enclosure B-41
u s e
SAS Cables B-42
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
C Review Questions
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
I
Oracle
O l Flash
Fl h
Storage System s a
) ha
om
SAN Administration forcR6.x
c e s e
s e rvi Guid
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Course Goals
After completing this course, you should be able to do the

following:
List the functions and features of Oracle Flash Storage System

(FS1-2)
Identify the components and explain the architecture of FS1-2
Use the Oracle FS System Manager, Oracle MaxMan, and
FSCLI a
Upgrade the system software ) has
Troubleshoot basic system problems c om
i c es ide
Monitor and generate reports
- s erv t Gu
Perform guided maintenance c s o den
p ra Stu
Provision storage o@ this fin se
r u
l f er to u
i g ue ense
o (m e lic Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 2

Course Agenda
Course Introduction Agenda, Prerequisites, and Lab Tour
Lesson 1: Overview Oracle Flash Storage System: Overview

QoS and QoS Plus
RAID Architecture
Lesson 2: Architecture
Day 1
Storage Profiles and Thin Provisioning
Storage Domains and T10 Protection
FS Web Portal
FS System Manager GUI and Navigation
Lesson 3: System Management Initial Settings and Storage Profiles
Rev
Volume Groups and Storage Domains
view/Knowledge Checks
Alerts & Events
SAN Overview
Connectivity with FSPM
Connectivity Without FSPM
Lesson 4: SAN Provisioning Provisioning Storage
Day 2
Host Mapping
Data Protection with Clone LUN and Copy LUN
s a
Lab Activity
) ha
Architecture and Rack
Pilots and Controllers
Lesson 5: System Hardware Drive Enclosures and DE Expansion
c om
es ide
Power and PDUs
MaxMan
i c

Statistics and Trending
System Alerts and Events
- s erv t Gu
Lesson 6: Monitoring and Maintenance
Reports
c s o den
Day 3
ra Stu
Call-Home and System Logs

p
System Status and Guided Maintenance
o@ this
Software Updates

u f i n
SNMP Traps
e
Lesson 7: Utilities

r r
FSCLI
u s
e l fe e to
FS Statistics Tools
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Topics Not Covered in This Course
This course does not cover the following topics:

Topics covered in other Oracle University courses:
Oracle Linux (including shell scripting)

Oracle Servers
MaxRep
M R D Data
t P Protection
t ti and dR Recovery
Topics covered in third-party courses:
Non-Oracle Host Systems Administration (MS Windows, AIX,
a
HP-UX, RHEL, CentOS, VMWare, and so on)
) has
Network Administration
c om
s
Shell,
Sh ll PPython,
h P
Perl,
l or B
Batch
h scripting
i i ice de rv Gui
Students should also be familiar with: o- s e t
c s e n
Storage Area Network (SAN) concepts p ra Stud
General RAID concepts ino@ this
SAN switch and HBA r r uf use
configurations
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Resources for the Oracle Flash Storage System
Oracle Technology Network (OTN)

http://docs.oracle.com/en/storage/
Release Notes (also available on MOS)

My Oracle Support (MOS)
https://support.us.oracle.com
Online System Handbook
https://mosemp.us.oracle.com/handbook_internal/Systems/FS1_2/FS1_2.html
s a
Oracle University ) ha
http://education.oracle.com c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
Note: Release
e notesn are not distributed with the software releases installed on the FS1-2;
u e t r a
they- are not included in the product documentation on the FS1-2. Release notes that
ig available
therefore,
Mare nonon OTN are for Major (for example, 6.0) and Minor (or Feature) (for example, 6.1,
6.2, and so on) releases. For release notes on patch releases (for example, 6.1.7, 6.1.8, and so
on), log in to My Oracle Support and search for the patch release.

How to Use the Course Materials
These course materials are divided into lessons that have the
following components:
Objectives: You should be able to accomplish the objectives

for each lesson. Objectives support the course goals and can
support other higher-level
higher level objectives.
objectives
Lecture: The instructor presents information specific to the
objectives of the lesson. This information helps you gain the
knowledge and skills necessary to succeed with the activities. s a
Activities: The activities take various forms, such as a ) ha
practice exercise,, self-check review q
p c
questions,, discussion,
om , or
demonstration. Each activity helps facilitate the i c es ideof
mastery
s e rv Gu
one or more objectives.
c s o dent
-
Visual aids: The instructor might p ra several
use S tu visual aids to
o@ thiins visual form. Visual
convey a concept (such as fainprocess)
aids commonly contain r r u
graphics, u s e
animation, or video.
fe e o
l se t
u
ig icen
o ( m l
Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
i n l e
r r uf ferab
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n

Conventions
I
Icons D
Description
i ti
Documentation: Indicates primary procedural or technical documentation

references that provide information about the topics described in the lesson
Additional resources: Indicates other references or links that provide

additional information about the topics described in the lesson
Note: Indicates additional information that can help students but is not crucial
s a
) ha
to their understanding of the concept being described. Students should be
able to understand the concept or complete the task without this information.
c
Examples of notational information include keyword shortcuts and minor om
system adjustments. i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
s
Important: Indicates the information, action,cor otask that
d eisnof significant
importance as it relates to this topic pra tu
Important!
S
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Conventions
Icons Description
Warning: Indicates that unintended results may occur and care needs to be
taken when following the procedure or action described
Caution: Indicates that damage to data, software, or the operating system

will occur if the user performs this action or does not follow guidelines
precisely. This warning does not indicate possible events. Instead, if the
action is performed, catastrophic events may occur.
Hazard: Indicates a risk of personal injury from a nonelectrical hazard or a s a

risk of irreversible damage to data, software, or the operating system. A ) ha
caution indicates that there is a possibility of a hazard (as opposed to c om
certainty),
t i t ) depending
d di on th
the action
ti off the
th user.
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
Extreme Caution: Indicates that either personal
c s o injury
d e nirreversible
or
damage to data, software, or the operating p ra systemS tuwill occur if the user
performs this action. This warning
f i n o@
e t iswill occur.
does nothindicate possible events. Instead,
f e r ru
if the action is performed, catastrophic
us
events
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Typographical Conventions
Operating system commands are shown as in the following

examples:
UNIX:
# cd /etc
Windows:
C:\>cd \bin
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
F
Courier lNew
eisrrusednsforfether names of onscreen computer output:
i g e
uUse lsn - trato list all files.
no
-al
M Courier New bold is used for characters and numbers that you enter:
To list the files in this directory, enter:
# ls
Courier New italic is used for variables and command-line placeholders that are replaced with a
real name or value:
To delete a file, use the rm filename command.
Courier New italic bold is used to represent variables whose values are to be entered as part of an
activity:
Enter chmod a+rwx filename to grant read, write, and execute rights for filename to
world, group, and users.
Italic is used for book titles, new words or terms, and emphasis:
Read Chapter 6 in the Users Guide.
These are called class options
options.

Lab Environment: Ethernet
s a
Windows
) ha
Server
2008
c om
i c es ide
Solaris
- s erv t Gu
10
c s o den
p ra Stu
Oracle
Linux
f i n o@ this
6
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u felabr environment details.
F err Anfor
Refer tol Appendix s
i g ue n-tra
M no

Lab Environment: SAN Fabric
s a
Windows ) ha
Server
c om
es ide
2008
i c
Solaris
- s erv t Gu
10
c s o den
p ra Stu
Oracle
Linux
f i n o@ this
6
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u felabr environment details.
F err Anfor
Refer tol Appendix s
i g ue n-tra
M no

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
1
Overview s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to:

Describe the Oracle Flash Storage System FS1-2
Identify the Flash Storage System software components

Explain the purpose of QoS and QoS Plus
Describe
D ib the
th function
f ti off Storage
St Domains
D i
Describe the FS1-2 System building blocks
Identify the basic management tools for administering the Oracle
Flash Storage System s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 2

Oracle Flash Storage System FS1
Intelligent Flash Management

Cost/performance optimization
Multi-workload consolidation
Unique QoS Plus: QoS-driven Auto
Tiering
Enterprise-grade RAS
Engineered for Oracle Databases s a
and Applications ) ha
Horizontal and vertical scaling c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eFS1 isnan application-engineered storage system that optimizes the use of Flash
u e t r a
- auto-tiering architecture to deliver the most cost-effective $/IOP and $/GB.
Mig non
in an adaptive
In the lesson titled Architecture,
Architecture, you will go through the system architecture in detail,
examining QoS, QoS Plus, RAID, Storage Profiles, Thin Provisioning, and Storage Domains.
The entire product is built to exploit flash technology. It can be configured as an All Flash
Array. It can be a combination of flash and HDD, or an all HDD array. FS1 QoS Plus software
is an intelligent management framework that automates data location in and out of flash; flash
tiers and can adapt to changes as they occur. This drives performance optimization in latency
as well as I/O, and enables users to use the performance gains of flash in the most cost-
effecti e way.
effective a
The FS1 was built for efficiency of performance not just going fast for the sake of going fast.
Cost has to be a consideration with performance and that is what the FS1 is designed to do
managed performance, optimized performance.

Through major advances in QoS, the Oracle Flash Storage System has fused I/O queue
management by business priority with data access profiling to know intelligently what is
important to the business, what is not, and then moving the data to the most cost-effective
storage tier in the system.
The FS1 maintains the highest level of enterprise-grade features in the Oracle shared storage
portfolio, with data protection, end-to-end data integrity checking (T10-PI), system recovery
protection, and extremely fast failover (<1 second to maintain applications access through
faults and failure scenarios).

The FS1 is engineered for Oracle Databases and Oracle Fusion Business Applications with
support for advanced database features, such as Hybrid Columnar Compression, Oracle
Enterprise Manager plug
plug-ins,
ins Automatic Data Optimization
Optimization, and much more
more. In addition
addition, the
FS1 provides a broad range of interoperability with non-Oracle products and operating
systems.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Inclusive Software Ships with Every System
RAS / Enterprise- Advanced Data Ease of

Grade Services Management
Controller Failover Time: Patented Quality of Service MaxMan: Multiple system

Less than 1 second (QoS Plus) management; single pane of
glass
Warm start error containment QoS-Driven Adaptive Storage
time: Less than 5 seconds Tiering (QoS Plus) Automatic storage tiering
Cold boot time: Typically <15 Flash tiering Real-time statistics
min Hybrid Columnar Compression Autopath management with
End-to-end data integrity support broad support for non-Oracle
checking via T10-PI (AIX, HP-UX)
Storage domains
All RAID options (incl RAID 6) Copy services (R/W clones
Storage Profiles for one-click
storage provisioning s a
) ha
Call home 24/7 fault and snapshots)
monitoring Unified: NAS and SAN
No SPOF
Thin provisioning
Wide stripe
p data layout
y with c om
Oracle EM and VM plug-ins
Pre-emptive copy (preventive ASM
i c es ide
Data protection manager:
drive maintenance) Application-consistent
recovery for Microsoft and - s erv t Gu Application-consistent cloning
Automated load balancing
Guided maintenance
Oracle DB (DPM)
c s o den VMware SRM, VAAI, VASA,
Prebuilt cabled and racked
from factory option p ra Stu vSphere support
f i n o@ this FS Mobile: Mobile Monitoring
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The slideF e
lists the nsoftware included in the FS1, which is a complete suite of management
u e t r a
software. The- FS1 ships with SAN capability (NAS coming soon) to provide a unified system.
Mig non
Multiple FS1s and legacy Axioms can be monitored and managed via one GUI, MaxMan.
Mobile management on Android or iPhones is available for both FS1 and Axiom with Oracle
FS Mobile. FS Path Management (FSPM) provides multi-path management and is important
in FS1 deployments in heterogeneous non-Oracle environments. RAID 6 provides deeper
drive protection and T10-PI end-to-end data integrity provides elimination of silent corruption.
A full suite of copy services, read/write clones, and application consistent recovery with Data
Protection Manager (DPM) is included for data protection.
Note: FSPM and DPM are downloaded separately and installed on host systems
systems.

Quality of Service: QoS and QoS Plus
High
Archive
Premium High Medium Low
Policy-based Quality of Service:

a
Prioritizes I/O between applications
has
Increases disk utilization across the storage system om)
E bl mixed
Enables i d I/O workloads
kl d on a single
i l systemt ices de
c
e v Gui
rcriticality
Optimizes performance based on application s
o- dent
c s
Provides instant and nondisruptiveraperformance
tu tuning
p is S
QoS Plus: n o @ th
u f i e
Provides QoS * Auto-Tiering
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
Qualityl ofFService s fer policies that can be used by administrators to adjust the
err ndescribes
ue n-oftrthe a Oracle Flash Storage System.
g
performance
i
M no
The strategic value of data varies according to application and business goals. The FS1 uses
QoS and QoS Plus technology to allocate system resources and handle data flow according
to its business priority.
The FS1 automatically tunes itself; therefore, all I/O requests are handled promptly but
preferentially according to their priority. For optimal utilization, the Oracle Flash Storage
System dynamically reallocates unused resources according to immediate demand while
guaranteeing that high priority I/O requests are always served first. QoS Plus provides QoS-
dri en adapti
driven adaptiveeaautomated
tomated data mo movement
ement to the most cost
cost-effective
effecti e class of storage
storage.

Automatic Intelligent Management
COLLECT STATISTICS
Read, Write, Random ,
Sequential, Frequency, and
COLLECT Priority counters for each 640
Advantages
KB sub-lun block
Granular data blocks
blocks
Comprehensive access
EVALUATE THE STATISTICS profile collection, not just
Analyze counters to access frequency
EVALUATE construct list for
a
promotion/demotion move Fast Learn mode s
candidates.
) ha
c om Adjustable Scanning
Periods
M D i c esmigration
i d e options
OVE ATA
Kick off a background v controls
Discrete
erand G u
MOVE process to promote or
demote the 640 KBso
- s n t
c d e
QoS Plus ra Stu
sub-lun block.
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The threeF e
phases nin the QoS Plus adaptive process for autotiering are Collect, Evaluate, and
u e - t r a
Mig non
Move.
As the I/O is running, the FS1 collects statistics on what is being accessed by access bias
(random/sequential) and I/O bias (read/write). This is done for each block of data to
determine what is hot and what is not later. These statistics are collected continuously.
After a time period that you can designate (which can be as short as a minute or as much as
weeks), FS1 scans these statistics and constructs a list of candidates that should be moved.
FS1 allows you to ask it to fast learn (a scan periodicity change). Fast learn takes the
standard scan period and divides it by 3, scanning 3x faster, and then reverts to standard
scan periods
periods. A completel
completely unique
niq e option for operations ssuch
ch as e
ever-changing
er changing sim
simulations
lations or
emergency ad-hoc analysis and reporting.

After the scan takes place and the candidate list is created, a background data movement
process is kicked off to move the blockspromote or demoteto different storage tiers and
if necessary change RAID types on the fly. You can regulate the background process through
throttle options. You can make it hold (not move), move with minimum impact to system
performance, move as fast as possible, or let the system choose.
Learning (Statistics collection) can take place only when I/Os are being issued. No I/O does
NOT mean all data is inactive and should be demoted, rather it means no learning is taking
place and the FS1 should NOT make migration decisions. This ensures that if a system was
idle over a three-day weekend for instance, it will NOT demote everything to the lowest tier.
The FS1 collects more than just frequency of use statistics. This allows for more intelligent
decisions to be made and reduce non non-beneficial,
beneficial, superfluous migration activity. After a period
of time (default is 24 hours), construct a move list based on collected statistics and QoS
settings and kick off a background process to effect the actual movementup or down or
RAID change.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Oracle FS1 Storage Profiles
One-Click Provisioning
g with Proven Best-Practices
1 2 3 4
An administrator The The Storage is

wants to administrator administrator provisioned at
provision launches the selects the a sub-
storage for an FS Storage right application
application. System application level based on
Manager. profile. the storage
class and s a
priority of the
) ha
c om data set by the
i c es ide application
profile.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Storagel F e
Profiles n
covering Oracle and non-Oracle applications are included with the FS1.
u e t r a
- of provisioning the traditional way, you just select a Storage Profile from a
Mig non
Therefore, instead
drop-down menu, and FS1 will provision your LUNs automatically, on the right media, with the
right QoS settings, and with I/O bias tuning applied for you.
All you need to do is to specify how large the LUN should be. Alternatively, you can use Thin
Provisioning and let the FS1 resize the LUN as needed.
Storage Profiles are predefined and tested for optimal provisioning of:
QoS Level (I/O Priority)
Access and I/O Bias
RAID level
Caching behavior and read-ahead

Storage Domains: Data Isolation Containers
Domain 1
Use Cases
Domain 2
Refresh Legacy or Aging Bricks
without disruption.
Isolate and secure application
data or workloads to physical
location.
s a
Domain 3
All Flash Domain option ) ha
c om
Separate
S es idore
t usercgroups
i
departments
- s ervto tphysical
G u location
for s
c o den
chargeback.
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u r
Storagel F
err nwere
Domains s fedeveloped to isolate data within drive (RAID) groups. You can
u e t r a
- groups (HDD and/or SSD) in any way to form a domain in an FS1. You can
Mig non
combine RAID
use all the Drive Enclosures (DEs) as a single domain. Each storage domain is like a unique
storage system. No other workload, data, or data service can cross the domain boundaries,
effectively soundproofing and isolating workloads from the noisy neighbor and one another
(efficient and secure multi-tenancy). Performance is modifiable on the fly by changing the
makeup of the storage domain or by moving application workloads to different Storage
Domains.
The basic unit of granularity for Storage Domains is a RAID Group. LUNS are striped across
multiple RAID groups to create Wide Stripes
Stripes, which serve to distribute I/O hot spots across
many drives, vastly reducing high latency spikes under heavy load. The actual stripe width is
controlled by the LUNs QoS setting. The higher the QoS settings, the wider the stripe, thus
delivering more potential IOPS to a higher QoS LUN.
In the lesson titled System Management, you will create a Storage Domain. In the lesson
titled SAN Provisioning, you will provision storage from the FS1 system to available hosts in
your practice.

Oracle FS1-2 Hardware: Building Blocks
Controllers Drive Enclosures
FS1 Controller 2U Drive Enclosure

2x Oracle Netra X3- Performance: 2.5 SAS
2 HDD (24 per enclosure)

NEBS certified Premium performance:
Two models: SSD (7 or 13 per
Base enclosure)
Performance C
Capacity
it SSD
SSD:
(7, 13, or 19 per
enclosure)
Management Common with ZFSSA
NEBS certified
s a
m ) ha
c o
FS Pilot 4U e
c s Enclosure
Drive
e
2x Oracle Server r i
v Gu Capacityi d
drives: 3.5
s e
X4-2 (or X5-2) Pilot
nodes c s o- de n24t HDD per
SAS HDD
p ra Stu enclosure
f i n o@ this Common with
r r u u s e ZFSSA
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The threeF e
hardware n building blocks in the system are the Drive Enclosures, the Controllers,
u e - t r a
Mig non
and the management nodes called the Pilots. There are two Drive Enclosure types. Both of
them have a capacity for 24 drives and are populated with drives of different technology and
speed/cost profiles. The large 3.5-inch drives are for capacity and the 2.5-inch unit carries
the performance disks and SSDs. These enclosures are common with ZFS. The Controllers
and Pilot use standard Oracle servers as a base.
The base OS for both the Controllers and the Pilot is Oracle Enterprise Linux (OEL). The
Controllers are available in two models: Base and Performance. The Performance model has
six times the memory (DIMMs) and twice the non-volatile memory (NVDIMMs) as the Base
model The Performance model also has additional Energy Storage Modules (ESMs) to power
model.
the NVDIMMs and is fully populated with SAS HBAs supporting up to 30 Drive Enclosures.
The lesson titled System Hardware discusses the FS1-2 hardware configuration in detail.

Oracle FS1 Storage System
Hardware
Controllers
Standard Oracle Servers
Oracle Linux (64-bit)

NVDIMMs: Flash-Backed
RAM Cache
Up to eight Replication
Engines
Drive Enclosures
Up to 30 DEs per FS1-2
Common with ZS s a
Drives ) ha
400 GB SLC and 1.6 TB c om
eMLC SSD/Flash i c es ide
300 GB, 900 GB, and 4 TB
- s erv t Gu
SAS-2 HDD c s o den
Rack p ra Stu
Common look and feel f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The Controllers andn Pilots are placed in the center of the rack and the DEs fill in from the
u e t r a
- grouped in strings.
Mig non
bottom and are
The FS1-2
FS1 2 supports a maximum of:
Five Drive Enclosures per string
Six strings for FS1-2 equipped with Performance Controllers
Four strings for FS1-2 equipped with Base Controllers (two SAS HBAs)

FS1 Management Features
Oracle Command Line

Interface (FSCLI)
Command-line interface for a

has
Primary GUI of Manages multiple
Oracle FS1 Oracle FS1 and/or scripting )
Simplified LUN Axiom 600s from c
Supported on all popular omUNIX
operations single pane of glass c es iand
and Linux distributions
i d e
Windowsser
v Gu
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
There areF e
three n components in the Oracle FS1 management feature package:
basic
u e t r a
-FS System Manager: Manages one FS1 at a time and allows in-depth
Mig Oracle
nona age e a
management and
d monitoring
o o go of a
all functions
u c o sa and
dpprocesses
ocesses within the
eaarray
ay
Oracle MaxMan: Aggregates status and alert notifications from multiple, geographically
dispersed FS1 Systems (and/or Axiom 600s) into a single pane of glass. Detailed
monitoring and management requests are dynamically passed to the appropriate FS1
system manager module.
Oracle Command Line Interface (FSCLI): Is designed for those who prefer scripting. It
enables automation of repetitive command operations and alerts. It is supported on all
popular
l platforms.
l tf
In the lesson titled System Management, you will walk through the installation process for
the Java management GUI and in the lesson titled SAN Provisioning, you will learn how to
provision SAN storage. The lesson titled Monitoring and Maintenance covers monitoring and
maintaining FS1-2 systems. In the lesson titled Utilities, you will download, extract, and use
the FSCLI.

Mobile Monitoring: Oracle FS Mobile
for iPhone or Android Applications
pp
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
Alerts and Usage by Domain Usage v GuPerformance
rby
eGroup
faults and Class s
o dent
-
Drive graphs
Mobile monitoring c s
of multiple FS1s p ra Stu
and/or Axioms
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You can l F e
monitor n FS1s and Axioms on an iPhone or Android smart phone, including the
your
u e t r a
- versions. Go to the Apple App Store and search for Oracle FS Mobile to
Mig non
latest software
download the application to your mobile device.

Lesson Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned to:

Describe the Oracle Flash Storage System (FS1-2)
Identify the Flash Storage System software components

Explain the purpose of QoS and QoS Plus
Describe
D ib th
the ffunction
ti off Storage
St Domains
D i
Describe the FS1 System building blocks
Identify the basic management tools for administering the Oracle
Flash Storage System s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1 Describe
1. D ib the
h ffunction
i off Q
QoS
S Pl
Plus.
2. MaxMan allows the Storage Administrator to do what?
s a
) ha
3. What are Storage Profiles?
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
4. Describe four use cases for Storage Domains. rac
so uden
p S t
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
5. What are the three o l e li
(main hardware building blocks for the FS1?
i n
uf ferab
r r
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n
6. The main FS1 management interface is called?
7. Which hardware component can be added to increase storage capacity?
8. What type of disk drives are used for storage?

2
Architecture s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Describe the function and purpose of QoS and QoS Plus
Describe how RAID is implemented on the FS1

Describe the function of Thin Provisioning
Describe the application of Storage Domains
Identify use cases for Storage Domains
Explain how to employ Storage Profiles a
) has
Explain the benefits of T10-Protection Information om
e s c
e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

QoS: Levels, I/O, and Cache Priority
S it h & Host
Switch H tE Environment
i t
Five QoS levels

Premium
High
Medium
Low
Archive
Dynamic I/O priority a
s
Higher QoS levels get more ) ha
Premium
High
Medium
Archive
Low
CPU resources.
c om
Dynamic cache management i c es ide
s e rv Gu
Higher QoS levels get more s -
o dQoS e t
nPlus
cache resources. c
ra Stu
p
Load balancing f i n o@ this Storage System Fabric
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l I/Os
All front-end n
received by the Controller will be prioritized according to the QoS level their
u e t r a
- have been assigned. All I/Os (blue buckets) will be queued within their QoS
Mig non
related volumes
level: Premium, High, Medium, Low, and Archive.
The Controller will process all I/Os depending on their assigned levels.
In addition to the I/O processing prioritization each volume gets cache allocated within the
FS1 system. The amount of cache for a volume depends on its assigned level. A higher level
gets more cache resources than lower levels.

Dynamic Quality of Service
Through Entire Oracle FS System
Pilot Controller Drives

Virtualization I/O prioritization Disk access
Console I/O allocation prioritization
QoS policy Dynamic cache Data layout
management algorithms according to
s a
) ha
Predictive Load balancing QoS policy
Dynamic stripe
modeling SW RAID
I/O queues for c om size
each priority
i c es ide
Striping and
- s erv t Gu
mirroring
I/O load c s o den
distribution p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
I/Os are F e
prioritized nfrom front end to back end. Administrators choose QoS levels, the rest is
u e t r a
- system. QoS Plus provides direct benefits throughout the entire FS1 Storage
Mig non
done by the FS1
System.
Pilot QoS Features
The system is configured at the Pilot level. Aspects such as virtualization establishment of
parameters, policy management, and modeling based on statistical analysis are done by the
Pilot. The Pilot software enables management and monitoring of the FS1 system. It enables
administrators to plan and provision storage capacity and to analyze the performance of each
storage resource.
Controller QoS Features
The Controller manages I/O bias through I/O prioritization and allocation, dynamic cache
algorithms, and provides load balancing.
Drive Enclosure QoS Features
The Drive Enclosure controls disk access prioritization, application of QoS policy to determine
data layout, and dynamic stripe size.

QoS/QoS Plus: Auto-Tiering
Each LUN can be configured as Auto-tier or Single tier.

Automatic Sub-LUN Tiering exists across all tiers of storage
and RAID levels with the most cost-effective granularity (640k

blocks).
Active progression of data between tiers can be enabled or
disabled as needed on a per-LUN basis.
Current tier allocations per LUN is displayed to the user
graphically. a
Auto-tiered LUNs can be Thin Provisioned. ) has
Clone QoS and Volume Copy py QoS is configurable
g c
and
om
supports auto-tiering. i c es ide
s e rv Gu
Controls are offered to the administrator s -
oregarding
e n t data
movement: Frequency and speed.pra
c tud
S
Data layout is optimized based
f i n o@
e this
on administrator-controlled
u us
and measured read/writeferr ratioo(bias).
e l se t
u
ig icen
o ( m l
i n l e
r r uf ferab
l FeWhen
Important:
e r a n s an auto-tiered LUN, it is recommended that you set the storage
creating
g
class
i o n -t this allows for hot data to be migrated to performance storage and cold
u to a mid-tier,
Mdata toncapacity storage. Placing new LUNs at the highest performance level sets up an
inefficient initial QoS.

Access Skew: Ratio Between Hot and Cold Data
QoS Plus divides data into fixed 640k fine-
fine
grained blocks to build a Heat Map.
Only around 5% of data is
I/O-active at any moment in

time.
That particular 5% changes
dynamically based on
business process cycles, a
a s
market events. )h
c om
The
Th 5% active ti iced s t is
data t
i enot
rv Gu the i d
senecessarily,
always,o-or n t
c s e
most
p tud data for
ra important
S
Data resident in a storage system f i n e this
o@business.
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
Key: l F
err nsfer
u=eHot ndata
- a
tr(IO-active)
i
Redg
M no
Yellow = Warm data
Green = Cool data
Light Blue = Cold data
Dark Blue = Deep archive data (I/O-inactive)
Note: Block is represented on LUN.
Access Skew
The block shown in the slide represents a common I/O access pattern to data where, at a
given moment in time, some data is very frequently accessed (hot), and some data is rarely
accessed (cold). Depending on the I/O activity at any moment, hot, warm, and cold data will
dynamically change over time, but at any given moment in time hot data is a small percentage
of the overall. Because hot data may not be business critical (for example, lots of people
accessing the video from the companies picnic last weekend), it is important that the system
not treat all hot data with high importance
importance, rather treat it appropriately based on its business
value.

Because data is always changing, static provisioning is not a good idea, storing all this data
on one tier of disk makes no sense. Putting data with low or no business value on high
performance flash is expensive. Conversely put, high business value data on slow capacity
disk will result in poor performance.
Data blocks that are hot need to be on premium performance media, but temper this with the
business value of the data. QoS Plus uses heat maps to do this (numerical measurements of
access density and number of I/Os within a defined block of data over a defined block of time).
QoS Plus also factors in the assigned business value of the data before making migration
decisions. High business-value data will quickly be promoted and tend to be kept on a
premium tier, whereas QoS Plus will be reluctant to promote, and anxious to demote it if it has
low business value.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

I/O Management with Oracle FS1
QoS Plus: IO Prioritization Based on Business Value
I/O Requests to Storage

Systems:
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 8 3 5 10 2 1 7 4 9
s a
Premium High Medium Low Archive
) ha
om
Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority
c
FS1 PPriority-In-Priority-Out
i it I P i it O t Queue:Q
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
FS1 Intelligent IO Management
s
Manage IOsuto f i o@ thiPriorities
nBusiness
e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
FS1 handles
t r n
I/OaManagement uniquely, not what showed up first (first-in first-out). FS1
u -
Mig non
services I/O according to business priority. When it comes to contention management of
noisy neighbors, you always look for QoS levels first for the order of service to request.

Drive Groups
Oracle Drive Enclosures are used as back-end storage for the

Oracle Flash Storage System.
Drives in each Drive Enclosure are logically divided into

objects called Drive Groups, which are used to manage a
collection of drives of the same Storage Class.
Class
Number of drives in a Drive Group depends on the drive type.
HDD Drive Groups consist of 12 drives, two Drive Groups per
DE. a
SSD Drive Groups consist of 6 drives, one to three Drive ) ha
s
Groups per DE. com
A Drive
Di G Group resides
id iin a single
i l Storage
St D icei s ide
Domain.
Each FS1 has one Primary Drive Group -that s ervcontains
t G u the
system-wide Persistence volume. racs tude
o n
The number of Drive Groupsoused @ p forisa LUN
S is based on the
fin se t h
QoS level. r r u u
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u fercreated, comprise a collection of Drive Groups, typically of multiple
Storagel F
err nwhen
Domains, s
g uetypes.n-tra
drive
i no is the name of the volume that contains the system configuration database. The
MPersistence
Persistence volume resides on a virtual drive in the Primary Drive Group. The virtual drive is
called the Persistence VLUN.
Drive Groups used for a LUN by QoS level:
Premium = 4
High = 4
Medium = 3
Low = 2
Archive = 2

RAID Levels
RAID Geometries provide high availability and data protection.

HDD Disk Group (12 drives per drive group)
1 stripe = 10 + Parity + Spare = RAID 5 with Active Spare

(single parity)
1 stripe = 10 + P-parity
P parity + Q-parity
Q parity = RAID 6 (double parity)
11 + S = RAID10 with Active Spare
COD segment: Each drive has a complete copy of data.
SSD Device Group (6 per group + 1 or more shared spares ) s a
5 + Parity + Spare* = RAID 5 (single parity) ) ha
6 + Spare* = RAID10 (mirrored/double parity) c om
Active Spares for R5 & R10 Disk Drive Groups i c es ide
Superior performance during normal operation - s erv t Gu
c s o den
All drives in groups used to provide
p raperformance
S tu
f i n o@ this
*SSD Drive Enclosures rinclude
r u one
u s e dedicated spare drive.
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u l
HDD Groups
e - t r an
ig slide
MThis n
nodescribes how stripes are allocated to each RAID level. RAID 5 on HDD disk
groups use 10 drives with single parity (P shown above) and rotating spare blocks, so there is
no dedicated spare drive required. RAID 6 on HDD disk groups use 10 drives with double
parity (P and Q shown above) using two parity blocks. RAID 10 on HDD disk groups use 11
drives plus a rotating spare block. RAID levels are not identified by level name, rather they are
referred to as follows:
RAID 5 = Single Parity
RAID 6 = Double Parity
RAID 10 = Mirrored Parity
SSD Groups
SSD Drive Groups have 6 drives plus 1 dedicated spare drive per Drive Enclosure. SSD Drive
Enclosures will have 1, 2, or 3 drive groups depending on how they are equipped (7, 13, or 19
SSD drives/DE).

FS1 Layout: SAS RAID 6/5S for Spinning Media
1 1
64K 2P 2P 24 drives split into
3 1 3 1
strip 2 groups of 12
2Q/s 2Q/s
3 1 3 1
420 2420 2
3P 1 3P 1
420 2420 2
3Q/s 1 3Q/s 1
420 2420 2
3 1 3 1
420 2420 2
3 1 3 1
420 2420 2
1 extent = 420 Stripes 3 1 3 1
a
420 2420 2 s
) ha
= 537,600 blocks 3 1 3 1
420
= 262.5MB 2420
om
2
420
3
c
s 1P e
1
2420
3 1
1P ice
2
420
s e r3 v Gu2id
2420
3 3
s o420- de1Q/s t 3 1Q/s

n2420
r a c t u 3
2
3
1 stripe contains 640K bytes. @ p is S 420P 420P
o
fin se t h 420P
r r u u
420P
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
This is la F
err nsfeofr RAID 6. 262.5 MB in our nomenclature is a quarter pig-a-byte. One
representation
g
pig-a-byte
i tra 1 GB, but is our version of a gigabyte.
ue isn-almost
M no
This is the layout of hard disk drives in the 24 Drive Enclosuresthere
Enclosures there are 2 drive groups of
12 drives.
You can imagine that each stripe is like a traditional RAID group and that these stripes rotate
the parity around the array with each new stripe. RAID 6 is new for FS1 and note that there is
no dedicated hot spare for RAID 5it is made up out of rotating strips.
Drive Enclosures with SSDs are offered in drive groups of 6 drives + a hot spare (one per DE)
with 7 drive, 13 drive, and 19 drive options.

Layout of Strips with Rotating Hot Spare
Drives 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
>
RAID C D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
RAID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 S
5S S D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 P2
RAID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 S

10S S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
s a
m) ha
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 o Q1
D9 D10 cP1
Q2 D11 D12
s
e D20
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 icD19 e P2
i d
P3 Q3 D21 erv D28GuD29 D30
D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 sD27
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
P = Parity strip Q = Parity strip S = Spare
no@and
strip is
ththus
f i
Rotating hot spare uses all drivesuactively
r s e increases performance.
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
There are
e
four RAIDn types that exist on spinning media (HDD).
u e t r a
MRAID on- = Configuration On Disk) is used to store the system configuration information
ig Cn(COD
and there is a copy on each drive
RAID 5S and RAID 10S have a rotating hot strip.
The new RAID 6 replaces the option for double redundant LUNs because two drives can fail
in the array before redundancy is degraded.
When a drive fails, some drives strips will copy, some will rebuild and some will just become
spares!

Drive Loss Scenario: Drive Failure (1 of 5)
Drives> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
RAID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 S
5S S D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 P2
RAID D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 S

10S S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11s a
) ha
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 c om QQ1
D9 D10 P1
Q2 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 i c es ide P2
D18 D19 D20
P3 Q3 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 - s erv t Gu D27 D28 D29
D30
s o
c tude n
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
In this example,
t r a n is a failure on drive #4. In the next several slides, you will look at how
there
u - as the system handles this failure.
Mig non
things change

Drive Loss Scenario: Rebuild (2 of 5)
Drives> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
No Action
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
RAID 5S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 S
Rebuild S D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D5
D14 P2
RAID 10S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 SD5
Rebuild
S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 a
D4
) has
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10cP1 om Q1
N A
No Action
ti
Q2 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 icD19 es D20
i d e P2
P3 Q3 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 sD27
- erv D28 t G uD29 D30
c s o den
p ra Stu
RAID 6 still has redundancy even with n @drive
oone is of action.
thout
ru f i e
f e r t o us
l
ue ense
i g
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l you
In this slide,
t r a n see that with RAID C there is no action required because there is
can
u
ig + D14)
sufficient -
redundancy for D1 and D2. On RAID 5S, the spares are used to rebuild the strips
M(D5 nonfrom the failed drive. On RAID 10S, the spares are used to rebuild the strips (D5 +
D4) from the failed drive. On RAID 6, nothing happens because there is still adequate
redundancy to deliver the data.

Drive Loss Scenario: Drive Replacement (3 of 5)
Drives> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
RAID C D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
RAID 5S D1 D2 D3 D4 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 D5
D14 D11 D12 D13 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 P2
RAID 10S D1 D2 D3 D4 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D5

s a
) ha
D4 D1 D2 D3 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
c om
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D6 D7 D8 D9 c
i es P1ide Q1
D10
Q2 D11 D12 D13 D15 D16 D17 D18
- s erv D19t G uD20 P2
P3 Q3 D21 D22 D24 D25 D26
c s o D27 d e nD28 D29 D30
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
With the F e
drive n the next step will be to replace the drive.
removed,
u e - t r a
Mig non

Drive Loss Scenario: Rebuild/Copyback (4 of 5)
Drives 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
>
Rebuild D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
(Copy)
RAID 5S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 D5
Copyback
D14 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 P2
RAID 10S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 s aD10 D11 D5

Copyback
D4 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 )h
D11a D9 D10
m
co
s
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 vD10
r i ce P1uideQ1
Rebuild Q2 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
o - se D19nt GD29 D30
D20 P2
P3 Q3 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 c s
D26 D27deD28
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
With the
u e l drive
- t r an
replaced:
Mig RAID
non5S and 10S perform a copyback where they will copy the data back to drive 4 to
RAID C performs a rebuild, which is just a copy of the data from one of the other drives.
re-create the full contents of that drive.

RAID 6 also performs a rebuild to restore the appropriate data for drive 4.

Drive Loss Scenario: Zero Spares (5 of 5)
Drives
D i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
>
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
RAID 5S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 P1 S
Z
Zero S
S D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 P2
RAID 10S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 S
Zero S
S D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 a
s
) ha
RAID 6 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 om Q1
D9 D10 cP1
Q
Q2 D11 D12 es D20
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 icD19
i d e P2
P3 Q3 D21 erv D28GuD29 D30
D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 sD27
c s o- dent
Zero out hot spare strips p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The finalF e
step ina n scenario applies to RAID 5S and 10S. For these two RAID types, the
the
u e t r
- contained the data that was rebuild when drive 4 failed are now returned to
Mig non
spare strips that
spare and the strips zeroed.

Internal Tiers Include RAID Level
Admins/users only see four tiers
Performance SSD RAID 10 RAID level is chosen by

actual Workload Pattern
Performance SSD RAID 5 (R/W bias) and capacity
constraints.
Capacity
i SSD RAID 10
Running out of capacity?
Capacity SSD RAID 5 RAID 10 RAID 6 or
RAID 5
Performance HDD RAID 10 s a
) ha
(automated)
Performance HDD RAID 5
c om
i c es igoing
d e
Capacity HDD RAID 10
up?s rv 6 GRAID
Write Frequency
eRAID u 10
s -
o den t
Capacity HDD RAID 6 c
ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Four Storage n are visible to the administrator, but there are eight classes under the
Classes
u e - t r a
Mig non
covers.
If you are running out of capacity, consider moving RAID 10 to RAID 6 or 5.
If the write frequency is going up, consider moving RAID 6 to RAID 10.

RAID Function Enhancement in Release 6.2
Copy Away
Use failure predication algorithms to pre-emptively copy data
from a drive before it fails.

The operation is performed on an array while it is still
redundant
d d t so errors can b be corrected
t d using
i parity.
it
The source drive is not removed from the array until the
operation is complete, thereby preventing a second drive a
failure from causing data loss.
) has
m
Failure prediction is based on: co s
Internal threshold exceeded error (SMART) rvice uide
Rate of increase of drive read/write erroro - se nt G
counters
a c s ude
r
Slow drive detection algorithms based
p St
on:
Average command execution
@
no timee th is

u f i s

eferr o u outliers
Excessive large command-time
l se t
u
ig icen
o ( m l
i n l e
r r uf ferab
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n

Data Scrubbing
Background media scan (BGMS)
All drives in parallel

Scrubbing load balanced between Controllers
Low performance impact:
Throttled down when other I/O is active on either Controller
Disabled during maintenance operations, zeroing, Controller s a
rejoin, or conservative mode ) ha
Sector repair when problems are found c om
i c es ide
Report LUN and LBA on failure
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Write Coalescing
Improves write performance
Is particularly valuable when RAID 5 or RAID 6 sector writes

can be combined into a full stripe operation
Primarily benefits SLAT and NAS I/O patterns
Takes advantage of the delayed destage write buffer
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Thin Provisioning
Example: Addressable
Logical Capacity = 500GB
Addressable Capacity
Online, automatic expansion
of allocated storage in the
Initial Capacity
background when required

Can be overcommitted by any
amount of capacity
Terminology Definition
Allocated Logical Capacity Initial storage capacity the Oracle FS1
s a
allocates to the volume within the system
) ha
g
Addressable Logical Capacity
p y Volume capacity
p c om
y the Oracle FS1 shows to
i c es ide
attached server/clients at initial creation
s erv t Gu
and displays maximum capacity possible
-
Overcommitted Capacity c
When maximums d e n capacity is
o addressable
ra the S
largerpthan tu actually installed
capacity
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eFlash nStorage System automatically expands volumes while they remain online.
u e t r a
ig nocan
MVolumes n-be overcommitted. A volume is overcommitted when its maximum capacity is
larger than its initial capacity. A volume can be overcommitted by any amount.
Thin provisioning depends on the relationship between the initial values you set for the
following parameters:
Allocated Logical Capacity: Initial capacity that you assign to the volume at creation
Addressable Logical Capacity: The capacity that is exposed to the host. Maximum
capacity to which the volume can grow.
Notes
Operating systems with allocation size limits will truncate to their defined limit.
The FS1 will generate an alert when the actual available capacity is 90% used.

Virtual Storage Machines: Storage Domains Containers
Storage Domains: FS1 software that

isolates data in storage containers
Domains are composed of RAID

Groups within Drive Enclosures.
RAID Groups can be SSD or HDD or
any combination thereof.
Storage
g Domains
RAID Groups in Drive Enclosures Domains physically segregate data,
avoiding data co-mingling.
RG RG Perf SSD RAID Groups
QoS Plus and all major FS software
operate uniquely on each Storage
RG RG RG Capacity SSD RAID Groups
Domain. Neither data nor data s a

) ha
RG RG Perf HDD RAID Groups (10K-rpm)
services can cross a domain
RG boundary.
c om
es idcan
Cap HDD RAID Grps. (7.2K-
RG rpm))
Up to 64 Storage i cDomains e exist
in each FS1.
- s erv t Gu
Thec #o
s of RAID e
d n and drive types
Groups
p rinaa Storage
S tu Domain are flexibly
n o @ this to optimize performance
configured
r u fi s e and auto-tiering impact.
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
Storage
e l Domains
t r a nwere developed to isolate data within Drive Enclosure virtual resource
u - combine DEs (HDD and/or SSD) in any way to form a domain within an FS1.
Mig non
pools. You can
You can use all the DEs as a single domain. Or, theoretically, you can have a single RAID
Group as a domain (not recommended but could happen for an isolation case of some kind).
RAID Groups (RG in the slide) are fixed sets of drives consisting of data space, parity space,
and spare space. The basic unit of granularity for Storage Domains is a RAID Group. Virtual
LUNS (VLUNS) are striped across multiple RAID Groups to create Wide Stripes, which serve
to distribute I/O hot spots across many drives vastly reducing high latency spikes under heavy
load. The actual stripe width is controlled by the VLUNs QoS setting. The higher the QoS
setting,
g the wider the stripe, thus delivering
g more potential IOPS to a higher
g QoS LUN. The
data stored in a storage domain is physically segregated in that domain within the FS1
storage pool. No data in one domain can trespass into another domain. This avoids data co-
mingling for those who wish to isolate data within the FS1. Examples of use cases for isolation
are for cloud services for discrete customer types and service levels, user groups, application
types, and/or regulatory reasons such as the PCI (Credit Card processing) standard, or
seperation of response time sensitive transactional data from static reporting data.

Additionally, Domains can be used to easily and nondisruptively upgrade to a new drive
technology as it becomes available. For example (future drive capacities used here are
hypothetical), to upgrade old 900 GB HDD trays to new 1.8 TB drives, just move the 900 GB
trays to a new domain and tell the FS1 to migrate the data off the 900 TB drives to the new
1.8 TB drives. When complete, remove the 900 GB trays.
The other key feature of domains is that all key FS software applies uniquely to a domain,
such as QoS Plus auto-tiering. That is, a storage domain can act like its own virtual FS1 within
an FS1 with its own set of data management rules while not conflict with any migration
settings in force in other domains. This gives you extreme flexibility in implementing the FS1s
data management features and tailoring them to exactly meet your business requirements.
When selecting the DEs
DE s and media types within a storage domain
domain, look at the # of spindles
and drive types carefully so your dont underconfigure the domain and inhibit the FS1s ability
to wide stripe and balance IOPS over a sufficent number of spindles.
Storage Domains may be all one drive type: SSDs, Performance HDDs or Capacity HDDs or
more typically encompass multiple types of drives to exploit the FS1s intelligent auto-tierings a
capability. Individual LUNS, RAID Groups and entire disk trays may be moved in and out of ) ha
c om
Domains nondisruptivly as business needs change. A Storage Domain is best thought of as a

c es ide
Virtual FS1 consisting of a subset of the entire pool. For example, you can create a virtual all
i
- s erv t Gu
flash array (AFA) and control exactly what data is flash resident. You can also change your
c s o den
mind later and move flash resident data to HDDs in a different domain. Or, you might choose
ra Stu
to add some HDDs to an AFA Domain and allow QoS Plus auto-tiering to migrate colder data
p
f i n o@ this
to HDDs, thus freeing up SSD space for more critical data and lowering your overall storage
costs with no performance impact.
r r u u s e
fe you
The flexibility of Storage Domainslallows
e e toto tune the media mix within any domain to
exactly what the application(s)
m i guneed,
c e nschange it later on the fly.
and
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Storage Profiles: Tuned for Specific Applications
Best Practices
Prevalidated and pretested
Optimize any application with 1-click

Reduce deployment risks
Seamless Integration
1-Click provisioning
Pretuned storage for Oracle DB and business apps a
) has
Integration with OEM 12c o m
RFast Predictable
Rapid St Extreme
id Storage Extreme
Deployment
D l t e s c
Performance
e r vic Guide
Enables self-service type storage provisioning
s o -s ent
Automates data layout and protection r a cschemes
tud
@ p is S
fino e th
Faster new application deployments
ru
f e r t o us
l
ue ense
i g
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l pretested
By using the
t r a n and prevalidated profiles, you can reduce deployment risks, improve
u -
Mig non
storage deployment time and maximize application performance using Storage Profiles. With
the integration to Oracle Enterprise Manager 12c, DBAs can monitor and manage multiple
FS1 storage systems right from OEM. Oracle continues to invest in Storage Profiles and will
cover all key Oracle business applications as they come to market.

Storage Profiles: OLTP Example
Oracle Database / OLTP Example
p
Pretested optimal provisioning
and QoS settings include:
Recommended Access I/O
QoS level (I/O Priority) Data Type Priority
Storage Class Bias Bias

Access and I/O bias
RAID level/Thin Provisioning
Premium -
Caching behavior and read- Control Files SSD/10K
High
Mixed Mixed
ahead
h d
Most application types ship Database
SSD
Premium -
Mixed Mixed
Index High
prebuilt with every FS:
Oracle Database / OLTP
s a
) ha
Archive / ILM Database Premium -
SSD/10K/7.2K Mixed Mixed
Tables Medium
Business Analytics / OLAP
c om
E
E-mail:
il Mi
Microsoft
ft E
Exchange
h
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Temp Files 7.2K Medium Mixed Mixed
Business Applications: CRM,
ERP, HR - s
o den
Online redo c s
Log Files
p ra Stu 10K High Sequential Write
f i n o@ this
Archive Log
r r u
Files
u s e 7.2K Low Sequential Write
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F
This is lan
err nofsfan
example Oracle database for Online Transaction Processing. The column
u e t r a
headers
Mthe on- the pretested, preconfigured settings that are in Storage Profiles for each of
ig datantypes.
represent

T10-Protection Information (PI)
End to End Data Integrity
End-to-End Integrit Checking
FS1 is an enterprise-grade storage system that utilizes T10-PI for complete end-to-end data integrity
checking. Using 8-byte metadata tagging to each 512 byte data chunk, FS1 leverages T10-PI to prevent
silent corruptions.
Oracle ASM sends Adapter sends FS1-2 validates

Oracles FS1-2
block with integrity HBA validates data block with metadata during
validates
metadata to adapter data. metadata across each internal
Metadata.
across PCI bus. FC domain to FS1. transfer.
s a
) ha
Database OS Adapter
p Switch c omin DE
Drive FS1
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
Application Data Validation T10 PI cs
o den T10 PI
p ra Stu
Application to Drive
f i n oData
e this
@ Integrity
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
T10 Protection
t r a n
Information (T10 PI), previously known as Data Integrity Field (DIF), is an
u - that supports the industrys commitment to end-to-end data integrity
Mig non
important standard
validation. T10 PI prevents silent data corruption, ensuring that incomplete and incorrect data
cannot overwrite good data and silent corruption will be identified on reads. Without T10 PI,
data corruption events may result in system downtime, lost revenue, or lack of compliance
with regulatory standards. T10-PI is the gold standard for data protection in an IT eco-
system.
T10-PI uses an 8-byte metadata tagging field to each 512-byte data chunk to prevent any
silent corruptions. The data protection information generated by Oracle Automatic Storage
Management (ASM) is validated first by the host operating system
system, then by the HBA (initially
Emulex LightPulse 8 Gb, and coming soon all others), and finally by Oracle FS1-2 Storage
System, ensuring protection through the I/O stackfrom application to the drive itself.
T10-PI will be used throughout the FS roadmap as new parts of the product line become
available.

Summary

Describe the function and purpose of QoS and QoS Plus
Describe how RAID is implemented on the FS1

Describe the function of Thin Provisioning
Describe the application of Storage Domains
Identify use cases for Storage Domains
Explain how to employ Storage Profiles a
) has
Explain the benefits of T10-Protection Information om
e s c
e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1. How many levels of priority queueing are available on each Storage Class?
2. LUNs can be configured as one of two tiering types; what are they?
3. What is access skew?
s a
) ha
comwhat parity?
4. Each of the RAID types available on the FS1 can be described as having
s e
c e
s e rvi Guid
c s o- dent
5. What is RAID C?
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
6. Describe overcommitted
m i gucapacity
c e nsin the context of Thin Provisioning.
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
e l Domains
7. Storage
u - t r an provide you with the ability to do what with the FS1?
Mig non
8. To what does 1-Click provisioning refer?
9. End-to-end data integrity checking is achieved using what standard?
10. Name all of the storage classes available on the FS1.

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
3
System
S t
Management s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Access and navigate the FS Web Portal
Download and install the Oracle FS System Manager

Navigate the Oracle FS System Manager
Verify System Status and Configuration
Modify system asset information
Create and configure an administrative user account a
) has
Configure global system settings o m
Use
U V Volume
l G
Groups e s c
e r vic Guide
Configure Storage Domains and Drive Groups
s o -s ent
Use Storage Profiles r a c tud
p S
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

References
Oracle Flash Storage System Administrators Guide

Oracle Flash Storage System CLI Reference
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Management and Administrative Interfaces
There are four ways to access and maintain the FS System:

Interface Type Description

Client software for accessing the FS
System Manager software as well
as technical documentation,
FS Web Portal Browser Interface
command-line utilities, a listing of
recent system alerts, and a
summary of system information
Client software for performing
s a
) ha
FSCLI Command Line Interface (CLI) administrative, configuration, and
monitoring tasks
c om
Client software fore
c s e
performing
Oracle FS System Java Client Graphical User i
rv Guid and
administrative, configuration,
Manager Interface (GUI) s e t
c s o- tasks
monitoring
e n
Oracle FS Client Graphical User p S tud for performing
raClient software
MaxMan Interface (GUI) f i n e his tasks on multiple FS
o@ selected
tsystems
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
The FS1-2 System
t r a ncan be managed or viewed in four different ways:
u n- Portal: This browser user interface is used to gain a quick view on the system
Mig FSnoWeb
status as well
e as download
do oad useful
use u ut
utilities,
t es, docu
documentation,
e tat o , and
a d the
t e FS
S System
Syste Manager
a age
installation packages.
FSCLI: This command-line user interface enables you to perform many of the
administrative, configuration, and monitoring tasks that can be done by using the FS
System Manager.
Oracle FS System Manager: This is the main Java client that is used to maintain the
FS1-2 System.
Oracle FS MaxMan: This client enables you to monitor multiple FS1-2 Systems and
launches the FS System Manager when management of system is required.
Notes
MaxMan is covered in the lesson titled Monitoring and Maintenance.
FSCLI is covered in the lesson titled Utilities.

FS
W b
Web
Portal
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Browser Access to the FS Web Portal
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l Management
FS Systems n begins with the FS Web Portal opened in a browser.
u e - t r a
ig access
MTo nonthe FS Web Portal, open a browser and enter the system IP address or the FQN of
the system. Initially, the system IP will be 10.0.0.2.
The basic navigation layout is tabbed and block based. The following are the tabs available:
Management Software
Alerts & Events
Information & Status
Utility Software
Documentation
D i
As you can see, these tabs are also displayed as blocks on the home page.

Recent Information and System Status
The System Information and Status page provides

a quick look at the status of the FS1-2 System.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The Information &n Status page provides a quick Read Only view of the FS1-2 System
u e t r a
- a good way to quickly check the system name, model, serial number, and
Mig non
status. This is
version of code that is installed. You can also see an at-a-glance status of the FS1-2 System.
A login may be required to access the System Information and Status.

Recent Alerts and System Events
The Alerts & Events page shows the

recent log messages and alerts.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Notice lthat
ewhen n navigate to Alerts & Events, a list of the most recent System Events
you
u e t r a
-This and majority of the other tabs are read-only. This tab displays a partial list
MofigSystem
is displayed.
non Events. To see the full list, log in via the Oracle FS System Manager GUI.

Documentation Download
Documentation can be downloaded in PDF

format from the Documentation page.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F errthe storage
This is lwhere n s f administrator can download most of the important documentation.
u e t r a
- as the Administrators Guide, Customer Service Guide, and the CLI
Mig non
Documents such
Reference can be downloaded (just to name a few).
Because the documentation resides on the FS1-2 System, any new updated documentation is
included with system update packages.

Downloadable Utility Software
FS Statistics Tool and Plug-in

utilities can be downloaded from the
Utilit S
Utility Software
ft page.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Utility
eSoftwaren page provides the ability to download extra tools such as the VDS and
u e t r a
VSS provider- for Microsoft applications, the SNMP MIB, and a useful Statistics tool.
Mig non

Downloading the Windows GUI
The Oracle FS System Manager GUI can

be downloaded from the Management
Software page.
Software page. Scroll
Scroll down
down to
to see
see more
more
management software.
s a
) ha
c om
i
The Oracle MaxMan c esGUI ican
d e
be
downloaded e
s rv the Management
from G u
s -
o Software
e t
npage.
c
ra Stu d
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eFS n Manager GUI, Oracle MaxMan GUI, and Oracle FS Command Line
System
u e t r a
- are located on the Management Software tab.
Mig non
Interface software
To install the Oracle FS System Manager GUI, the storage administrator needs to download
the appropriate installation method.
The Oracle FS System Management application is provided in two flavors:
Windows Installer, which does not require Java to be installed
JAR and Run scripts, which are for those system administrators that do not run
Windows desktop or those that do not want to run the Windows Installer. This
p
installation option does require
q Java 1.7 or later to be installed before running
g these
scripts.

Downloading the Windows CLI
Management Software and CLI can

be downloaded from the
Management Software page. s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
FSCLI lisF
err nforsfdifferent
provided OS systems such as Solaris, Oracle Linux, Windows, and so
u e - t r a
Mig non
on.

GUI Installation: Windows .msi
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
You can choose an alternate installation path. If
p ra Stu
you have more than one FS1-2 with different
versions, you will be offered an option to install
f i n o@ this
multiple versions side by side. r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
After you
l F e
download n the Windows Installer, double-click the .msi file and follow the prompts.
u e - t r a
Mig non

GUI Installation: Windows .msi
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Desktop
S tu Icon Created
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
This is lthe
econtinuation
n of the Windows installation for the Oracle FS System Manager.
u e - t r a
Mig non

Java Runtime Environment (JRE) GUI
.zip and .tar
s a
) ha
c om
1. Extract the zip file or tar archive to a directory. i c es ide
2. Run the appropriate batch file (for Windows) or shell script (for
v toGinstall
erUNIX) u the GUI.
- s
o den t
s
3. Installation requires that JRE version 1.7 or later be installed.
c
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
For users
l F e
not n Windows or who do not want to run the .msi installer, installation of the
running
u e t r a
GUIs can be-performed by using either a .zip file (Windows) or a .tar file (UNIX/Linux).
Mig non
Windows batch files and UNIX shell scripts are included in the archives. Java Runtime
Environment (JRE) 1.7 or later is required on the host for the installation.

System
Manager
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

User Accounts
Preconfigured Administrative Accounts
Role Login ID Description
Primary System administra Can perform all configuration, management, and monitoring tasks
Administrator tor Cannot delete or disable this account
Is used by Oracle support personnel

Support pillar Can perform limited customer service functions
Cannot view, create, delete, or modify customer data
User-Created Administrative Accounts

Role Login ID Description
Administrator 1 <You create> Can perform all configuration, management, and monitoring tasks
s a
Can perform all tasks except: ) ha
Creating and modifying administrator accounts
c om
Administrator 2 <You create> Modifying global,
global SNMP settings
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Modifying software or hardware configurations
Shutting down the system
- s
o den
c s
Can display only system information
Monitor <You create> Can modify own account
p ra attributes
S tu
Support
Can perform
n
< You create> Cannotfiview,olimited
e thisorservice
@ customer functions
f e r ru create,
us
delete, modify customer data.
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Password Protection
To protect your security, Oracle enforces strict rules for

choosing passwords for access to the Oracle FS System
Manager.
Passwords:
Mustt be
M b 8 tto 16 characters
h t llong
Cannot contain dictionary words
Cannot be any of the last 50 passwords
a
Must contain at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase
) has
om
letter, one numeric character, and one special character
c
e s
If you forget
f your password, d you can reset it. i
e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
To recover a forgotten password or to reset
r a ca password,
tud you
must have an email address configured p anS
and s email server must be
configured for the FS1-2. See iEmail
f n o@Notifications
thi in this lesson.
r ru us e
l f e t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Logging In to an FS System Manager
Using FS System Manager
Language
FS System IP or host name
FS Acct login and password
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Login
S u
tPage
s Management IP = 10.0.0.2
o@ thiDefault
f i n e
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
After you install
t r the
a n GUI on your desktop, double-click the icon to open a dialog box to log in
u
by using the -Oracle FS System Manager.
Mig non
Enter or select an FS1-2
FS1 2 system name or system IP to launch the Oracle FS System
Manager. On initial login, the storage administrator needs to add three items:
Oracle FS name: This can be a fully qualified DNS name or IP address. During the
initial installation, the FS System will have a default IP of 10.0.0.2.
Login name
Password
Warning: To successfully use Forgot password or Reset password
password, an email address must
be entered for the account and an email server must be configured in Email Notifications. If
you use Forgot password, the FS System Manager will email you a message to recover your
password. If you use Reset Password, the FS System Manager will email you a password
token. If you do not have an email server configured in the environment, you will need to
contact the Primary Administrator or another user with an Administrator account to
assistance you in resetting your password.

GUI: Pilot Mismatch
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
s e rv Gu
When the Java client version does not match the installed
c s -
o deversionnt of the FS
System Pilot Management software, you will
p rareceiveSthe
tu above error message.
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
If you have
ea n installed version of the FS System Java GUI and attempt to log in to
previously
u e t r a
- with a different version of the management software, then you will receive a
Mig non
an FS1-2 System
warning message. Possible actions include the following:
Ignore the message by clicking the I understand unexpected behavior may occur if I
override. message, and then click the Override and Continue button.
Cancel and download the version from the Oracle FS System Manager that you are
trying to connect to and login using the correct version.
If you are working with multiple FS1-2 Systems that have different versions of the R6.x
management software, you can download multiple versions of the Oracle FS System
Manager Java GUI
G by selecting install side-by-side during the GUI
G installation.

Default Landing Page
Initial Asset Information may be unknown.

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F err Manager
The FSl System n s f is a Java-based client that interfaces with the FS1-2 System. It
u e t r a
provides the -storage administrator system access to perform administrative, configuration,
Mig non
and monitoring tasks quickly and efficiently.
On first login, the default landing page is the System tab on the System Information content
pane. On subsequent logins, the landing page is the last page viewed at logout.
If this is a first time login to the FS1-2 System, the initial asset information may be listed as
unknown. There are six configurable items in the System Information content pane:
Name: The system name, such as FS1, or a fully qualified name, such as
fs1.company.com. This name will be displayed on the GUI status bar.
Description: A short description of this system, such as Engineering FS1 or other
descriptive text that you desire
Location: Normally, the physical location of the unit, such as room number or lab name
Contact Name: The individual or group that is responsible for this system
Contact Phone: The contact number for the individual or group responsible for this
system
Asset Number: The corporate asset number for identification

Navigation
C t tP
Content Pane
Menu Bar
Tab-based
navigation
Navigation
Pane
s a
Collapsible tree
) ha
navigation
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
Dynamic p ra Stu
Status Bar
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The navigation n of the Oracle FS System Manager supports tab browsing, which allows
pane
u e t r a
- of one of four main administrative functions:
Mig non
for the selection
Syste Basic
System: as c syste
system aand
d network
et o sett
settings
gs
SAN: SAN-specific configuration functions, such as LUN creation, deleting, SAN host
Mapping, cloning, and so on
NAS: (Disabled for release 6.1. This tab will be enabled in a future release.)
Support: Support-specific functions, such as firmware updates, log collections, and so
on
In addition, online Help can be accessed from the Help menu on the menu bar at the top.
The navigation pane corresponds to the selected function or category in the selected tabbed
menu and provides access to tasks or information.
In the example in the slide, the System tab is shown and System Information displayed in the
right-navigation pane.
Use the Oracle FS System Manager throughout this course to perform tasks to configure,
monitor, protect, and support the FS1-2
FS1 2 System.

Menu Bar
Logoff
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Complete set n ofo
@ this
onr f i documents
uthe FS Pilots e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The slideF e
provides na more detailed look at the menu bar items. The Oracle FS drop-down
u e t r a
- the same throughout your login session. The Actions, Tools, and Help
Mig non
menu remains
drop-down menus change to provide relevant actions, tools, or help based on the tab and
item selected in the navigation pane.
The complete set of system documentation is available in the Help menu.

The Technical Documentation page provides links to Oracle Flash Storage System
documentation and is accessed from the Help menu. Documents are in PDF format and
include:
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Sortable, Drillable Information Can sort (in either direction) on any column
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l pane
The content nprovides a list view of information based on the selection from the
u e t r a
- The information can be sorted by column and if multiple sorts are required,
Mig non
Navigation pane.
then press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting the columns.

Online Context-Sensitive Help
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The Help F e
menu n context-sensitive help. In this slide, the navigation pane shows that the
offers
u e t r a
user is on the- System tab with Event Log selected. So the Help context-sensitive selection is
Mig non
Event Log.

Status Bar
Hardware Most Recent System
y Number of Users g
Current Background
Status Alert Name Logged In Processes
Overall System Current View Current Display Background

System Alert Icon User User Sessions Processes
Status
Icon System Alerts

(Amber, blinking)
The system prompts the administrator to respond to system events.
Administrator actions may or may not be of critical nature.
The administrator needs to perform specific steps to resolve the s a
problem.
) ha
System Hardware Status
c om
Description
St t Icon
Status I
i c es ide
The system is functioning normallye
s rv Gu
(Green).
c s o dent
-
ra stateS(Yellow).
The system is in a warning
p tu
n @ thinisthe system is in a critical state (Red).
ocomponents
r u i
One or more
f s e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The status
ebar, n is located at the bottom of each page in the Oracle FS System
which
u e t r a
- additional information about the state of the system and its users.
Mig non
Manager, provides
The following page explains the features of the status bar.

Status Bar Details
Icon or Field Description

Overall System Status Displays the overall status of the system
Hardware Status Displays the overall status of the system hardware components
System Alert Displays system events that require the Administrator to respond.
Click System
System Alerts
Alerts in the Navigation Pane on the System Tab
Tab.
Most Recent System Alert Displays the date and time of the most recent Alert that occurred
on the system
s a
) ha
System Name om
Displays the system name, in this case, fs1-2.us.oracle.com
c
i c es ide
Current User Displays the name of the account under
- s ervwhicht G u
you logged in
c s o den
p ra Stu
Number of Users Logged In Shows the total number
n o @ users
of
t h is currently logged in to the system
r r ufi use
Users button l
Clicketo
e alltousers currently logged in to the system
fdisplay
i g u ense
o (m e lic
Current Bkgd Processes
f i l the name of the most recent background task or icon
n abShows
u
rr sfer executed by the system via pop-up
F e
u e l
- t r an
M ig non
Tasks button Shows the Background Processes page. You can select a
specific
ifi ttaskk that
th t is
i running
i and,
d if applicable,
li bl cancell itit.

Viewing Active Sessions
The Oracle FS System Manager can support:
Five
Fi active
ti sessions
i ffor each
h administrator
d i i t t accountt
A maximum of 25 active sessions
(Two sessions are reserved for the Primary System Administrator and Support accounts.)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l System
The Primary n Administrator and Support accounts have their own reserved sessions.
u e t r a
- of 25 active sessions supported at any given time. Two are reserved for the
Mig non
There are a total
Primary Administrator and Support accounts. If a session is inactive for more than 20 minutes,
the system terminates that session, and prompts you to log in again.

Dashboard
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The Dashboard n
displays recent system Alerts and Events in the upper portion of the content
u e t r a
pane and bar- graphs representing the capacity status for each Storage Class in the lower
Mig non
portion.

Tab Navigation: System Tab
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l tab
The System n
provides access to global system information, configuration, features, and
u e t r a
- FS1-2 System.
Mig non
functions of your
Drive Group 002 in this slide is called the Primary Drive Group, designated by the number 1 in
blue overlaying the Drive Group icon. The Primary Drive Group contains the systemwide
persistence volume containing the system configuration database. The system selects one
Drive Group as Primary. This can be changed. The system default is to select the slowest
class available. If you add Drive Enclosures of a slower class than exists, the persistence
volume will automatically be moved to the slowest class.

Tab Navigation: SAN Tab
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
The SANl F e
tab n access to information and configuration tools specific to SAN
provides
u e
provisioning.- t r a
Mig non
Note: The NAS tab is disabled when the system is biased to SAN and the SAN tab will be
disabled when the system is biased to NAS. NAS will be available in a future release.
Items on the SAN tab are covered in detail in the lesson titled SAN Provisioning.

Tab Navigation: Support Tab
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Support
e tab n
provides access to special tasks and information relating to system
u e t r a
- and system updates.
Mig non
troubleshooting
This tab is discussed in detail in the lesson titled Monitoring
Monitoring and Maintenance.
Maintenance.

Initial
Settings
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Modify Asset Information
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Duringlthe
einitial n
installation and configuration of your FS1-2, you should enter the relevant
u e t r a
- which will then appear in the System Information content pane.
Mig non
asset information,

Modify Network Settings
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l the
Also, during n installation and configuration, the network setting and notification
initial
u e t r a
services are -set up for your environment.
Mig non
Note: iSCSI functionality will be disabled for Release 6.

Modify Network Settings: Interfaces
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u r
F err ntabsfofethe
On thelInterfaces Modify Network Settings dialog box, you configure the
u e t r a
- Interface and DNS Settings. Choose DHCP or Static IP depending on your
Mig non
Management
network requirements. The Transmit Setting default is Auto and you should keep that setting.
Selecting a transmit speed and duplex mode that is not supported on your external network
may result in loss of access to the Pilot.
If you are using Static IP addresses, you will need four IP addresses, one for each Pilot node,
one for the Public Interface, and the Gateway server IP address in the subnet of which the
FS1-2 is a member.
For DNS settings, you can provide two IP addresses: one specifies the Domain Name Server
th t is
that i used
d tto resolve
l IP addresses
dd andd th
the other
th specifies
ifi IP address
dd iin case th
the primary
i
DNS server cannot be reached.

Modify Network Settings: Notification
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
You setl up
eemail n access and Call-Home triggering on the Notification tab. Enabling
server
u e t r a
- allows you to receive status notification via your email account.
Mig non
Email Notifications
It is highly recommended that you enable Call-Home
Call Home Triggering. When configured, Call-Home
Call Home
works with Auto Service Request (ASR) to send all notifications and associated logs to My
Oracle Support (MOS). No customer data is in a Call-Home transmission. Call-Home will
ensure that Oracle Support will be aware of any event on your system that requires attention
immediately, possibly even before you are aware of a problem.
Call-Home is covered in detail in the lesson titled Monitoring and Maintenance.

Settings for ASR: Call-Home
Call-Home is a feature that, when enabled, works with the Auto

Service Request (ASR) to send all notifications and associated
log files to MOS. Collections of log files (Bundles) are initiated by

one of the following:
Manual: Administrator requested log bundle
Event-Triggered: A log bundle created by FS1-2 events. This
bundle will be uploaded to MOS.
a
Periodic: A scheduled collection of log files
) has
When ASR is activated, MOS receives a daily heartbeatcevent. om If
this event is not received, an SR is sent to Customer c s efor
eSupport
i
rv Guid
resolution. s e
o- nt
cs tude
r a
p is S
Important! No customer data isfisent o @ th
n in ea Call-Home transmission.
r u s
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l activated,
After ASR is
t r a n MOS expects to receive a heartbeat event daily from the FS1-2. This
u
ig ASR
keeps
Mweekly onin- an active state. The following options ensure that MOS receives daily and
nnotifications:
Standard periodic Call-Home
Larger periodic Call-Home
You should not change the option schedules for either of these.

Create Administrator Account
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You canl F e
modify n accounts and create new administrator accounts to allow users to
existing
u e t r a
- tasks on the FS1-2.
Mig non
perform various
Administrators have specific privileges that are based on their assigned roles for their
accounts. You can create multiple accounts. Additional accounts are useful, for example, if
you want to delegate responsibilities.
When you install the system, you should create at least one Administrator 1 account, which
can be used while the Primary Administrator is unavailable. One reason is that besides the
Primary Administrator, only an Administrator 1 can modify an account password (including
that of the Primary Administrator) without knowing the previous password.

Modify Security Settings
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Modifylthe
eSecurity n Settings to update the account properties.
u e - t r a
ig Session
MThe non timeout period specifies when to terminate an inactive session. The default value
of the timeout is 20 minutes; 999 is the maximum allowed value.
The Consecutive failed login attempts allowed parameter specifies the number of times you
can attempt, but fail, to log in to the FS1-2 before the account is disabled. The default value is
10.
In the same configuration window, you can enter a message that is displayed on the Oracle
FS System Manager login screen.

Modify System Time
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u fertime across all FS1-2 System components. You can use Use
F err nsthe
Set andl synchronize
g ue Time
External n - ra to synchronize its clock with Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers.
tSource
M i no
Or, you can manually specify a date and time.

Storage
Profiles
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Storage Profiles
A Storage Profile is a set of QoS attributes that optimize a

volume for a specific application or task and combines all
provisioning attributes.
QoS level, access + I/O bias, redundancy
A Storage Profile can be selected when configuring a LUN.
The FS1-2 offers predefined Storage Profiles.
Example: MS Exchange, SQL, Oracle, Xen, streaming media,
and so on a
Administrators can create and customize Storage Profiles.) has
A Storage Profile can accelerate and streamline application
c om
deployment. i c es ide
Available options include: - s erv t Gu
o n
cs tude
Select preconfigured profiles r a
Duplicate preconfigured profiles
@ pto modified
i s S
o t h
Create new profiles rufin se
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
An FS1-2 comes
t r a n numerous predefined QoS templates called Storage Profiles.
with
u
Additionally, -you can create your own Storage Profiles for specific applications or modify the
Mig non
predefined templates. Storage Profiles ensure that storage administrators provision an
application with predefined QoS parameters to ensure a consistent rollout.
After initial provisioning with a predefined Storage Profile, the Storage Administrator can
always change QoS parameters of a specific LUN if its I/O performance behavior changes
over time.
In addition to the preconfigured Storage Profiles provided with the FS1-2, you can create your
own. Although an existing Storage Profile cannot be modified, it can be duplicated, and then
th copy off the
the th profile
fil can b
be modified.
difi d

Storage Profiles: View Storage Profile
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The ViewF e
Storage nProfile action displays the properties of a Storage Profile showing the
u e t r a
Name, RAID-Level, Read Ahead policy, QoS Priority, and Storage Class. The Advanced
Mig non
section displays additional QoS properties.

Storage Profiles: Create Storage Profile
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
You can F e
create a n
Storage Profile that defines a collection of QoS properties that differ in some
u e - t r a
Mig non
way to the Storage Profiles that have been predefined. You can also duplicate a Storage
Profile and modify its properties to create a new profile.

Volume
Groups
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Volume Groups
Volume Groups are organizational units that can contain any

grouping of logical volumes or logical unit numbers (LUNs)
and nested Volume Groups.

Volume Group properties:
AV Volume
l G
Group mustt have
h a unique
i name.
A Volume Group can contain up to 10 nested groups.
Maximum number of Volume Groups is 5000.
a
Volume Groups can contain storage objects that reside in has
different Storage Domains. m )
o
cill also
When
Wh d deleting
l ti a V
Volume
l G
Group, any nested bjicet s will
t d objects d l b
e be
r v u i
deleted. -se t G s o den
c
ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Volume l F e
Groups n administrative objects that are used to organize LUNs and, possibly,
are
u e t r a
- Groups. Volume Groups can span Storage Domains. A Volume Group can
Mig non
other Volume
contain logical storage objects, such as, other Volume Groups, LUNs, and Clone LUNs.
Use Volume Groups to organize storage objects that parallel your organizational structure,
geographic structure, or other logical unit of your choosing.

Managing Volume Groups
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The slideF e
shows n to manage volume groups including Create, Modify, and Delete. After
how
u e t r a
- Groups in the navigation pane, right-click anywhere in the content pane and
Mig non
selecting Volume
select Manage Volume Groups from the drop-down menu.

Assigning Volumes to a Volume Group
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Select lthe
evolume nto be assigned, and then select the Volume Group to which it will be
u e
assigned. - t r a
Mig non
Use cases:
1. If an IT department charges other departments based on space used in the IT
infrastructure, they can set Volume Groups with quotas.
2. Volume Groups can be used for reporting and filtering statistics.

Storage
Domains
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Storage Domains
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Storagel F e
Domains ngive you the flexibility to store your data in logical groups that meet your
u e - t r a
Mig non
storage requirements. A Storage Domain is a virtual storage pool that consists of an
assortment of drive groups.
Use Storage Domains to isolate data to Drive Enclosure sets to enable security or regulatory
compliance objectives.
The Oracle FS System Manager provides flexible options for creating, modifying, or removing
Drive Enclosures from Storage Domains.

Storage Domains: Creating a Storage Domain
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
To createF e
and n a Storage Domain, select System > Storage Domain > Actions >
configure
u e t r a
- Domain. Enter a name for the Domain and configure as required. The
Mig non
Create Storage
Create Storage Domain dialog box contains a number of settings including:
Background Process Priority: Determines how client I/O will be prioritized. Choices
include:
- System Chooses (default)
- Minimize Impact
- Maximizes Speed
Enable Automatic Q QoS Rebalancing:g ((Default)) Specifies
p that rebalancing
g occurs when
new drive groups are added to the domain
Enable Tier Reallocation: (Default) Specifies that data progression is enabled
Enable Tier Reallocation Statistics Collection: (Default) Collects data usage patterns
for the domain to analyze and determine the optimum storage classes for data

Auto-Tier Scan Options (Advanced): Optimizes the auto-tier algorithm for moving data
to different storage classes
Performance-Optimization Scan Cycle: Specifies the frequency, in hours, that
auto-tier scans to move frequently accessed data blocks to a high performance
storage class
Number of n-hour Scan Cycles: Specifies the frequency that auto-tier runs the
performance-optimizing scan cycles before auto-tier runs the cost-optimization scan
cycle
Cost-Optimizing Scan Cycle: Displays the frequency, in hours, that auto-tier
scans to move infrequently accessed data blocks to a less expensive storage class
All
Allowable bl St
Storage C Capacity
it ffor A
Auto-Tiering
t Ti i LUNs:
LUN Indicates
I di t th the maximum
i
percentage of storage capacity to dedicate to auto-tier reallocation for each storage
class of the Storage Domain. Default is 100%.
After a Storage Domain is created, you will need to assign storage to the domain.
s a
) ha
Storage is added by assigning one or more unassigned Drive Groups to the domain.
The number of drive groups assigned to a domain and the storage class available in the
c om
domain directly affect the performance of the volumes that are on that domain.
i c es ide
Drive Groups belong to a single Storage Domain. An unassigned Drive Group means
that it is available to be assigned to any Storage Domain. - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Adding Drive Groups to a Storage Domain
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Add DriveF e
Groups nto Storage Domains:
u e t r a
- create a new domain
Mig After

non
you
When you need to increase storage capacity
When you need to add a particular Storage Class
You can add multiple Drive Groups to a Storage Domain at one time. Oracle recommends
that you assign Drive Groups during a time when the system is idle or with minimal I/O.

Modifying a Storage Domain Storage Classes
available in this
Domain
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
For each F e
storage n the Modify Storage Domain dialog box graphically displays the
class,
u e t r a
- physical capabilities. The graph in the slide uses colored bars of different
Mig non
Storage Domain
thickness to indicate the capacity status of each storage class. Place the cursor over each
graph to display capacity. The settings for the domain can be changed temporarily or
permanently as needed. Remember that all LUNs in the domain will be affected by
domain-level changes.
Note: Refer to the section Creating a Storage Domain earlier in this lesson for details on
each of the settings.

Removing Drive Groups from a Storage Domain
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
When adding
e aa n Group to a storage domain, one of two conditions exists:
Drive
u e t r
- Enclosures have been installed and you are assigning their Drive Groups to a
Mig Newnon
do a
drive
domain.
You are moving a Drive Group from another domain. Moving a Drive Group from
another domain involves two steps:
1. Remove the Drive Group from its current domaindata in that Drive Group will be
migrated to the remaining Drive Groups in its current domain.
2. Add the Drive Group to the new location, that is, another domain.

Drive Group: Exclusion in Progress
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The migration n from a Drive Group can take a few minutes to several hours depending
ofadata
u e t r
- of data being migrated. During the migration, the Drive Group will be excluded
Mig non
on the amount
from its current Storage Domain. It is recommended that you plan to perform Drive Group
removals when the system is idle or has minimal I/O activity.

Alerts
and
Events
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Alerts and Events: Status Summary
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
Use Status
eSummary n under Alerts and Events to quickly access the hardware status and view
u e t r a
system alerts- and events. This view also presents hardware status of any MaxRep
Mig non
Replication Engines and that are registered to the FS1-2.
Alerts and Events are discussed in detail in the lesson titled Monitoring and Maintenance.

Alerts and Events: System Alerts
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
If the FS1-2
esystem n has any system alerts, you can view details about the alerts and perform
u e t r a
any required-action from the System Alerts page. You can sort the available list by category.
Mig non
If the alert is resolved, it will be removed from the list. If the alert persists, the alert will remain
on the alert page. You can view details of the any alert by selecting an alert and double-
clicking the alert.

Alerts and Events: Event Log
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Event
eLog n displays the events of the system. Events include management actions
page
u e - t r a
Mig non
such as the creation or deletion of LUNs and any problems encountered by the FS1-2
System, such as hardware issues or other problems detected in the Controller or with the
Oracle FS System Manager.
You can set filters to control which category and/or severity is displayed.
There are three types of event categories:
Security
Audit
System
There are three types of event severities:
Informational
Warning
Critical
These are covered in detail in the lesson titled Monitoring
g and Maintenance.

Lesson Summary

Access and navigate the FS Web Portal
Download and install the Oracle FS System Manager

Navigate the Oracle FS System Manager
Verify
V if System
S t Status
St t and d Configuration
C fi ti
Modify system asset information
Create and configure an administrative user account
a
Configure global system settings
) has
Use Volume Groups o m
e s c
Configure Storage Domains and Drive Groups
e r vic Guide
Use Storage Profiles o-s nt cs tude
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1 What graphical user interfaces are available for the Oracle Flash Storage System in
1.
Release 6?
2. What type of utilities can be downloaded for the Oracle FS System?
3. For those who do not want to run an installer package on Windows, what options exist
for downloading and running the Oracle FS System Manager? a s
) ha
c om
i c es ide
4. What is the default system IP address?
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
n @ this
ouser
5. What account is not permitted to access
r u f i s edata?
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
6. What Fisethe
u
rr purpose f erof the System Status icon?
l an s
u e - t r
Mig non
7. On which tab in the Oracle FS System Manager can you check the status of Pilots,
Controllers, and Drive Enclosures?
8. Where is the Oracle FS System Manager downloaded from?
9. What event severities are displayed in the Event Log?

10. What is displayed by clicking the identified items on the status bar?
a) ________________________________________
b) ________________________________________
c) ________________________________________
d) ________________________________________ a
s
) ha
11. Where in the GUI would you enable Call-Home Triggering? c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
12. Name three properties that are configured in apStorage ra SProfile:
tu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
13. What major steps o ( involved
are l e li in moving a Drive Group from one Storage Domain to
i n
uf Domain? ab
r r
another Storage
f e r
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n

Practice
3-1: Install the FS1 UI

3-2: Explore and Configure System Settings
3-3: Locate and Identify System Information

3-4: Duplicate and Modify a Storage Profile
3-5: Create Volume Groups
3-6: Create a Storage Domain
3-7: Create an Administrator Account s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Note: Depending non the number of students in the class, you may share an FS1-2 system
u e - t r a
Mig non
with other students. Configuring the FS1-2 system settings should be performed by a single
administrator. To prevent configuration conflicts, consult with your instructor to determine if
you are sharing your assigned FS1-2 system.
If you are sharing the training environment with other students, this practice should be
performed as a team.
Important: Refer to the Lab Environment Information in Appendix A for details on your
assigned lab equipment. If you have not been assigned a system, consult your instructor.

Practice 3-1
Install the FS1 UI
Overview
In this practice, you install the Oracle FS Storage Manager GUI.
Assumptions
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1-2 System for your team.
Install the GUI and Log In to the FS1-2

a
hasfor
1. Log in to your assigned Windows host. (Refer to the Lab Environment appendix
)
details.) om c
e s
r v ic uide
2. Open a browser session and enter the IP address of your - e
s assigned t GFS1-2 in the
address field to open the FS Web Portal. Select the s o n
de Software section to
c Management
locate the downloadable file for your Windowsphost. S r a t u
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
3. Select the Windows Installer lpackage
e fe e for to x64 by clicking the link to download and install
the client application. igu ns
m
( e li c e
f i n o b l
4. Follow the u
rrprompts f a
einr the setup wizard to install the GUI.
F e s
u e l
- t r an
M5.igAn icon
nonfor the Oracle FS System Manager should appear on your desktop. Start the
GUI by using either the desktop icon, or selecting Start > All Programs > Oracle FS
System Manager 6.1.x.
6. Log in by using the credentials provided for your assigned system.
Congratulations!
C t l ti ! You
Y have
h completed
l t dPPractice
ti 3 3-1.
1 If you have
h any questions
ti about
b t this
thi
practice, ask your instructor.

Practice 3-2
Explore and Configure System Settings
Overview
In this practice, you explore various areas and preform specific actions via the Oracle
FS System Manager.
A
Assumptions
ti
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1-2 system for your
team.
s a
FS1-2 Administration Lab ) ha
c om
1 From the Oracle FS System Manager of your assigned FS1
1. FS1-2, es idthe
2 perform
i c e following
activities.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
2. Locate the system serial number. Enter it here p a Stu
r______________
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
3 What is the current system name?
3.
e l fe ___________________
e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
4. What six (6) assetf i n l fields can be modified?
information
a b
u
rr sfer
F e
u e
a)
l
- t r an
_____________________________
Mig non
b) _____________________________
c) _____________________________
d) _____________________________
e) _____________________________
f) _____________________________
5. Select Modify Asset Information and complete the available fields.

6. Configure the Login Screen Message to say, Welcome to the <system name>
FS1!, where <system name> is the name entered in the Asset Information.
7 Set
7. S t the
th Session
S i timeout
ti t period
i d for
f allll administrators
d i i t t to
t 100 minutes.
i t
8. How many consecutive failed login attempts are allowed? ________
9. Set the System Time via System > Global Settings by entering the NTP Server IP
addresses.
addresses
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 3-2. If you have any questions about
this practice, ask your instructor. s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 3-3
Locate and Identify System Information
Overview
In this practice, you locate and identify specific information about your FS1 system.
Assumptions
Make sure that you have your student guide. This practice can be performed
individually.
s a
) ha
Identifying System Information
1. What version of the FS1 software is your system running?
c om
Version # _______________________ i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
2. How much total storage capacity is available? rac
so uden
p S t
f i n o@ this
Performance SSD __________ r r u u s e
Performance Disk __________ e l fe e to
m i gu cens
Capacity SSDo ( __________
l e li
f i
uDiskn ab__________
Capacity
r r f e r
e l Fe ransTotal __________
i g u
o n -t
M n
3. What drive model is used on your FS1 in Drive Enclosure 01?
4. What are the modes of the Pilot units?
this practice, ask your instructor.

Practice 3-4
Duplicate and Modify a Storage Profile
Overview
In this practice, you create a custom Storage Profile by duplicating an existing profile
and modifying it. You will use this profile later in this course.
A
Assumptions
ti
individually.
s a
Copy and modify a Storage Profile ) ha
c om
1 Navigate to the System tab and select Storage Profiles under Global
1.
i c es idSettings

Settings.
e
- s erv t Gu
2. Find the profile named Performance Benchmark. c s o deitnto open the actions
Right-click
panel and select Duplicate Storage Profile. pr
a Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
3. box rename thelStorage
3 In the dialog box,
e fe e Profile to Alter the RAID level
Profile. level, Read Ahead
Ahead,
and Priority settings. When u
ig you s
n satisfied with your changes, click OK.
eare
( m l i c
u f i no able
4. Locate your
e rr custom f r
eStorage Profile and open via View Storage Profile.
l F n s
i g ue n-tra
M g no
Congratulations! You have completed
p Practice 3-4. If yyou have anyy questions
q about

Practice 3-5
Create Volume Groups
Overview
In this practice, you create Volume Groups to be used later in this course.
Assumptions
individually.
s a
) ha
Create Volume Groups
Volume Groups are organizational units that may contain any grouping ofoLUNs
c m and
nested Volume Groups.
Groups If you do not create any Volume Groups,
Groups all
esLUNs
created
i c i d e
rv exercise,
will simply display <none> in the Volume Group category. Inethis
s G u you create
two Volume Groups. so - en t
r a c tud
@ p is S
1. Click the SAN tab in the Oracle FS System f i o th and select Volume Groups
n Manager,
u e
in the navigation pane.
l f err to us
i g ue ense
2. From the Actions o (m e licmenu, select Manage Volume Groups to open a
drop-down
dialog box.rufi
n abl
F e r s f er
u e l
- t r an
3.igClicknthe
M onCreate button at the lower left in the dialog box to open the Create
Volume Group dialog box
box.
4. Enter Production as the name of the first Volume Group. Click OK.
5. Repeat the previous step to create another Volume Group named Test.

Practice 3-6
Create a Storage Domain
Overview
In this practice, you create a Storage Domain and place Drive Groups in it to be used
later in this course.
A
Assumptions
ti
Make sure you have your student guide. This practice can be performed individually.
s a
) ha
Create a Storage Domain
1. On the Systems tab, select Storage Domains to display the Storageo
c m
Domains
context pane.
pane
es e
e r vic Guid
s o -s ent
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Create
r a cStorage
t u dDomain and enter the
name Archive for the new domain. Review the
@ p settings
i s S and click OK to accept the
defaults. o
fin se t h
r u
l f er to u
i g ue enseDrive Groups, you will need to remove Drive
3. Because there are no unassigned
Groups from Storage
o (mDomain
e lic 1.
fin rab l
r u
l F er nsfe
i g e Storage
4. In the
u n - tra Domains context pane, locate the two Drive Groups with Capacity
M Disknaso the Media Type. Select one of these and from the Actions drop-down
menu select Remove from Storage Domain.
menu, Domain
5. In the Remove from Storage Domain dialog box, change the Migration Priority to
Maximize Speed and click OK. Review the Confirm Drive Group Exclusion
warning and click OK. Review the Warning message and click OK.
6. Observe that the Drive Group now displays Exclusion in Progress instead of
Normal.
7. The Drive Group will eventually be identified as unassigned.
8. Repeat the removal process for the second Capacity Disk Drive Group.

9. When both Drive Groups are unassigned, you can assign them to your newly
created domain. Select one of the unassigned Drive Groups and from the Actions
drop-down menu select Add to Storage Domain.
10. In the Add to Storage Domain dialog box, select your new domain and click OK.
11. Repeat this process to assign the other unassigned Drive Group to your new
domain.
12. Verify that both of the Capacity Disk media Drive Groups are now assigned to your
new domain.
a
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 3-6. If you have any questions) about has
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 3-7
Create an Administrator Account
Overview
In this practice, you create your own Administrator Account to be used for most of the
remaining practices in this course.
A
Assumptions
ti
individually.
s a
Create an Administrator Account ) ha
c om
1 On the Systems tab,
1. tab select Administrator Accounts to displayethe
c s currently
e
i i d
configured accounts on your FS1-2.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
2. Create a new Administrator1 account using your p ra name.
S tuLog out of the system and
log in again by using your new account. f i n o@mostthofisthe remaining practices of this
For
course, you should use your new r r u
personal u s e
Administrator1 account.
l f e t o
i g ue ense
Congratulations! You o m completed
(have lic Practice 3-7. If you have any questions about
in instructor.l e
this practice, ask
r r u fyour
f e r ab
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
4
SAN Provisionings a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Describe the FS system SAN features and topology
Explain the need for multi-pathing software

Install Flash Storage Path Manager
Provision single-tiered storage
Provision auto-tiered storage
Convert LUNs from single-tiered to auto-tiered and from auto-as a
tiered to single-tiered m )h
Manage SAN hosts s co
r v ice uide
Create and manage Clone LUNs
o - se nt G
Create and manage LUN Copies prac
s ude
t S
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

References

g
Oracle FS Path Manager, Release 4
Oracle FS Path Manager Release Notes, Release 4.0
Oracle FS Path Manager Release 4 Installation Guide for AIX
Oracle FS Path Manager Release 4 Installation Guide for HPUX a
Oracle FS Path Manager Release 4 Installation Guide for Linux ) has
Oracle FS Path Manager Release 4 Installation Guide c om
c e s Solaris
for
e
i i d
ervGuide ufor Windows
Oracle FS Path Manager Release 4 Installation
-s ent G
s o
c tud
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

SAN: Overview and Features
Flash Storage Path Manager Data Protection and Replication
s a
SAN
) ha
Virtual
Capacity
Presented
c om Capacity
to Host
i c es ide Physical
- s erv t Gu Capacity
o den
Auto Tiering racs Thin tu Provisioning
p S
f i n o@ this
LUN Management r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
This lesson
e n Flash Storage Path Manager (FSPM) and LUN management. It also
discusses
u e t r a
- LUNs and modifying LUN attributes, creating auto-tiered LUNs, configuring
Mig non
covers creating
LUNs for Thin Provisioning, and local Data Protection and Replication.

SAN Overview: LUN Management
LUN Expansion 2.5 TB

Online, automatic
Unlimited size = system
2 TB
storage capacity
Up to 4096 LUNs per
SAN Host (per FS1)
LUN-ABC
s a
) ha
LUN-DEF
om
SAN
SAN Port Masking (not
c
i c es ide visible to host)
LUN2-XYZ
- s erv t Gu
Mapped as LUN1 o
c s d e n
p ra Stu LUN-XYZ
n o @ this Storage Pool
ufi use LUN Mapping

Up to 8 FS1
Systems per SAN Host r r
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
The SAN l F e n supports LUN mapping and port masking or zoning. LUN mapping is the
Controller
u e t r a
- a given LUN to any host as any LUN number, independent of LUN numbers
Mig non
ability to present
already in use.
Port masking can restrict host access to one to three SAN Slammer ports. Initiator access to
LUNs is controlled through the initiator's World Wide Name (WWN).
Port masking allows:
Configuring which Controller will expose a LUN. The default is that all Controllers are
eligible.
p
Exposing g a LUN only
y on a single
g Controller at a time
Warning: LUN port masking is not recommended because redundancy can be compromised
in the event of a failover.
LUN mapping allows you to configure which hosts can access a LUN.
A maximum of 4096 LUNs can be exposed to a single host on one FS1. A single SAN host
can be connected to up to eight FS1 systems at once.
If Flash Storage Path Manager is installed,
installed LUN capacity can be expanded online
online. The
maximum LUN size is equivalent to the FS1 storage system capacity.

SAN Topologies
SAN Controller
Point-to-Point
Up to six FC ports per Control Unit
Up to 12 FC ports per Controller
Port 0 Port 1
One or more World Wide Node Names

(WWNN) CU 01
12 World Wide Port Names (WWPN)
Fibre Channel Protocol Support CU 02
Point-to-point
P i tt i t (di
(directt connect)
t)
Fabric attach
FC supports 16 Gb/s SAN Host
s a
) ha
Port 0 Port 1
c o mCU 01
SAN
c e s e
s e rvi Guid
s o - ent
SAN c
ra Stud
@ p i s CU 02
SAN Host o
fin se t h
r u Switched Fabric
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u l Axiom
The Pillar
e - t r anstorage system supports the following SAN topologies:
Mig Fabric
non
Private
Pri ate FC-AL
FC AL
Point-to-point
SAN-based storage is the most popular method for networking storage. SAN storage
sees only machine data or blocks of data, and does not understand files or content.
One of the biggest advantages of SAN storage is its ability to provide optimal
performance when used with any application. In general, SAN storage is well-tuned
f high
for hi h ttransactionoriented
ti i t d applications,
li ti such
h as th
those th
thatt use d
databases
t b and
d
email. Additionally, an enormous amount of time, resources, and investment has gone
into SAN interoperability and quality assurance.
The Oracle FS System Manager provides the GUI interface for setting up the SAN
environment.

Asymmetric LUN Access
Controllers are Active/Active, Asymmetric

A host will see a LUN through both Controllers. One Controller
will provide an optimal path to a LUN, the other will provide a

nonoptimal path.
If the SAN host is running Flash Storage Path Manager
(FSPM), the host will use only the optimal path.
Otherwise, the FS1 will attempt to balance the access to the
array if nonoptimal paths are utilized. a
) h as
Events are generated for every 100 nonoptimal accesses. m
s co
r v ice uide
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
Controllers are
t r a n
Active/Active, Asymmetric. A host will see a LUN through both Controllers.
u - will provide the optimal path to a LUN and the other Controller will provide a
Mig non
One Controller
nonoptimal path.
A host can send I/O through either Controller without causing a LUN to move from one
Controller to another. I/O down the nonoptimal path is slower than I/O down the optimal path.
Optimized paths are preferred over nonoptimized paths for performance. Nonoptimized paths
occur when there is no path management software used to manage data paths, the path
management software is not configured correctly, or an optimized path is not available.
Path management software and applications provide load balancing and path management
for improved performance.
The Controller will generate a nonoptimized access event for each 100 nonoptimized
accesses it detects.
When the FS1 receives a nonoptimized access event, it will change the owner node for that
LUN, causing the other paths to become the optimized paths, and will start a timer. If no
further nonoptimized accesses are received for 5 minutes, ownership will be changed back to
the original node.
node If this causes
ca ses nonoptimized
nonoptimi ed accesses
accesses, it will
ill re
revert
ert to the pre
previous
io s node and
every five minutes, you will see this switch back and forth. Then if no further nonoptimized
accesses are received, it reverts to normal operation.

SAN Capabilities and Limits (per FS1 System)
Supports up to 12 x 16 Gb FC ports per Controller pair or a

mix
8192 LUNs per Controller pair, of which 4096 may be mapped

to a single host
512 active
ti connections
ti per port,
t 12 ports
t per Controller
C t ll pair i
Equals a maximum of 6144 connections per Controller pair
Auto load balancing on DE adds a
s
Storage Domains: ) ha
Minimum # = 1 ((default domain)) c om
i c es ide
Maximum # = 64
- s erv t Gu
Volume Groups: c s o den
Minimum # = 1 (default group@ pra is Stu
<none>)
o th
Maximum # = 5000 rufin e
l f er to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Host
Connectivity
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Flash Storage Path Manager (FSPM)
FSPM is software that runs on SAN host systems:

Enables SAN LUN multipathing, one way or another
Integrates into management system on Pilot: GUI and CLI

Has a common functionality for all multipath SAN hosts
Enforces OS updates and patches where needed
Enables host log collection for SAN problems
Is strongly recommended for all SAN hosts s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The purpose of a n is to enable multi-pathing features for SAN hosts connecting to an
FSPM
u e t r
Oracle Flash-Storage System FS1-2 system with release 6.x software or an Axiom 600
Mig non
system running release 5.x software. The FSPM package is installed on the host system and
ensures host log collection to the FS1 or Axiom system and enables communication between
the host and the storage system Pilot or management unit. FSPM allows configuration from
within the storage system GUI. FSPM does not replace the native path management
software. It works with the native OS that provides additional functionality, such as enabling
the communication between and management of the host and FS1 or Axiom systems.

Flash Storage Path Manager (FSPM)
Path management software from host to FS:

Is key to interoperability with diverse server operating systems
Automatically configures host into Oracle FS Storage Services

Manager and updates configuration information if host
i f
information
ti changes
h
Manages multiple paths to the Oracle FS1
Ensures that optimal paths are used based on FS1 ALUA a
s
(Asymmetric Logical Unit Access) design
) ha
Traffic load-balanced across all available paths reducing
c om
unnecessary failovers and I/O hot spots i c es ide
v er t Gu
- s
o den
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e 1 OS Dependent
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F err nthesfconfiguration
FSPM lautomates tasks for the Oracle FS system and updates the
u e t r a
- host configurations change. FSPM manages multiple fibre channel paths to
Mig non
information when
the FS1 and ensures that the optimal paths are used based on ALUA. All traffic between the
host and the FS1 are balanced across all available paths reducing failovers and I/O hot spots.

Installing FSPM on Different Platforms
There are FSPM products for the following server operating

systems:
Windows Server 2008 and later

Linux: Several recent Linux Server releases
Solaris 10 and later
AIX 5.3 and later
HP-UX 11i v3 u3 and later s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
There are
e
currentlynfive operating systems supported by FSPM. If you have legacy Axiom
u e t r a
- which you used Axiom Path Manager (APM), then FSPM replaces APM and
Mig non
hardware with
provides additional functionality. FSPM connects to both Pillar Axiom and Oracle FS systems.
FSPM should be used to replace older installations of APM. APM will work with existing
Axiom systems; however, no new releases of APM will be provided. The upgrade path is via
FSPM.

Where to Get FSPM
Download FSPM from:

http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/server-storage/san-
storage/downloads/
One ZIP file for each release of each FSPM product
Installation packages for each supported hardware platform
Installation Guide PDF, Release Notes PDF, readme text file
Installation Guides also available under OTN Storage a
Documentation at: ) has
http://docs oracle com/cd/E57633 01/index htm esc
http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E57633_01/index.htm
om

e r vic Guide
The Installation Guides cover much more than s o -sFSPM e n t
Installation.
c
ra Stud
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

When to Install FSPM
When connecting the host to the Oracle FS System:

Make a SAN connection from the host
Install FSPM on the host

FSPM automatically configures the host in the Oracle FS
S t
System.
No need to configure FC WWNs in the Oracle FS System
Manager GUI
Ready for mapping LUNs s a
) ha
FSPM can be installed later if the host was manuallycom
s
configured.
fi d ice ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F errbe installed
FSPM lshould n s f when configuring initial connectivity for a SAN host to the FS1.
u e t r a
Ensure that a- LAN connection between the host and the Pilot is enabled for the management
Mig non
communications between the host and the FS1.
Note: If the hosts are on an isolated LAN and are not able to communicate with the FS1, then
the management functions of FSPM will not be enabled. The FSPM daemon or service needs
a data path to integrate with the Pilot software.

Flash Storage Path Manager
SAN Host FSPM control paths (dashed lines) ensures
optimal path even when a data path is down.
Application FSPM daemon FS1 GUI/CLI
Linux multipath Support for Solaris, OEL,

Windows,, HP-UX,, AIX,, RHL
Encrypted
NIC XML/TCP/IP a
s
driver driver
) ha
HBA/NIC HBA/NIC c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
FC p ra Stu
Redundant data paths (RED)
f i n o@ this
managed for full access to all
r r u u s e
LUNs in Oracle FS1.
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F err access
FSPM lprovides s f
n over multiple redundant data paths to LUNs defined on an FS1
u e - t r a
Mig non
system and creates a control path or management path via the FSPM daemon running on the
host. The control path enables the Pilot to collect logs, update load balancing settings on the
FS1, and bring newly mapped LUNs and paths online.

Installing FSPM
1. Read the Oracle FS Path Manager Release Notes.

2. Verify that required OS patches and updates are installed.
3. Preconfigure the SAN host as described in techdocs.

4. Verify that the network and FS1 meet installation requirements
(for example, FSPM communicates to the FS1 Pilots and
Controllers).
5. Ensure that the SAN host has appropriate FC HBAs and their a
required software installed. ) has
6. Download the FSPM software to the SAN host. c om
i c es ide
7. If required, extract the contents of the software
- s ervbundle
t G u archive
to a local drive. cso den ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Windows Installation of FSPM
Windows Server installation:

1. Verify that you have administrator privileges to install the
software.
2. Close all applications and management applets.
3. In Windows Explorer, double-click the FSPM package that you
downloaded.
4. If prompted, restart the Windows host. a
s
The installation process is complete. ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p a Stu
rInstallation
Refer to the Oracle FS Path Manager @ 4 s Guide for
o h i
t instructions.
Windows for detailed step-by-step
r u fin installation
s e
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Linux Installation of FSPM
Linux Server installation:

1. Verify that you have the privileges to install the software.
2. Use rpm to install the software package that you downloaded.

The installation process is complete.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p a Stu
rInstallation
Refer to the Oracle FS Path Manager @ 4 s Guide for Linux
o t h i
r u fin instructions.
for detailed step-by-step installation
s e
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Solaris Installation of FSPM
Solaris Server installation:

1. Log in as root to install the software.
2. Before you install, if necessary, activate the Oracle Solaris

I/O multipathing features via stmsboot.
3. Use pkgadd to install the software package you
downloaded.
The installation process is complete. a
s
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p a Stu
rInstallation
Refer to the Oracle FS Path Manager @ 4 s Guide for Solaris
o t h i
r u fin instructions.
for detailed step-by-step installation
s e
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

SAN Host Access on the FS1 System
1. In the GUI, on the SAN tab, navigate to Storage > Hosts.

2. Verify that the individual entries for the host ports are grouped
under the host name.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The following Oraclen FS Path Manager Status and Controller-Initiator Connectivity messages
u e t r a
- on the Hosts page:
Mig non
can be displayed
S
FSPM Status Communicating:
Co u cat g The e host
ost co
control
t o pat
path is
s logged
ogged in to tthe
e Pilot.
ot
- Note: Communicating status is required for the FSPM control path to report path
status and use the Oracle FS System to collect FSPM diagnostic logs.
Not Registered: A control path from an FSPM with this name has never logged in to the
Pilot.
Not Communicating: The FSPM host control path was logged in to the Pilot, but is not
now logged in to the Pilot.
Controller-Initiator Connectivity
- Connected: The host SAN connection is logged in to a Controller on the Oracle
FS System.
- Not connected: The host SAN connection is not logged in to a Controller on the
Oracle FS System.
See the Oracle Flash Storage System Online Help for information about the remaining fields
on the Hosts page.

Associate SAN Hosts Without FSPM
Associate Hosts when FSPM is

not installed on the host.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
A Host-to-HBA n
u e - t r aassociation can be created when FSPM is not installed. This can be
Mig non
done for hosts
of their HBA.
that are listed as Hostname Unknown and are referenced by the WWN
Select Storage > Hosts on the SAN tab, and then select Associate Hosts from the
Actions menu.

Associate SAN Hosts Without FSPM
Choose or enter a Host Name.

Selecting to assign the

WWNsWWNs to Host
to the
the Host name opens the
name opens the window presenting all
window
availablewith all available WWNs.
WWNs.
s a
Click
SelectAdd> to assign
the WWNs a WWN with the HBA
associated
) ha
in your host and click Add> to assign a
WWN. c om
i c es ide
iSCSI disabled in R6 - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
In the lAssociate
u e - t r anHosts dialog box:
Mig 1. nEnter
on a Host Name (one of your own choosing or the actual host name from
the system you are associating)
associating).
2. Create Association (options).
Specify WWNs: If you know the WWNs for the FC HBA in your host,
enter them one at a time and click Add> for each to move it to the
Associations field. Then click OK.
Specify iSCSI device name: This is disabled for R6.
Select from discovered WWNs: This will open a box (as shown above)
with a list of available WWNs. Find the WWNs associated with your host,
select each one and move it to the Associations field by clicking the
Add> button. Then click OK.
Select from discovered iSCSI devices: This is disabled for R6.

Verify Association
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u l
From Storage
e - t r a>nHosts, verify the association as well as the connectivity status of
Mig non is well, the Controller-Initiator Connectivity will show Connected
each port. If all
and the Status will show Communicating (unlike the example in the slide).

Provisioning
Storage
St
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Before You Begin
Review the Flash Storage Support and Interoperability Guide.

Follow the guidelines for Oracles recommended LUN
configuration.
Have a thorough understanding of the SAN fabric
environment,
i t including:
i l di
Zoning
Server host HBA and FS1 port connections into the fabric
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u fer
err nunderstanding
Havingl aFthorough s of the SAN fabric environment (zoning in place, server host
u e t r a
- port connections into the fabric) will position the administrator to provide a more
Mig non
HBA and FS1
resilient FS1 SAN storage solution.

LUN Provisioning Properties
When defining a logical volume, you can set the QoS policies for
the following properties:
Size of the LUN: Input value is on per GB basis.

Storage Class: Configure storage on preferred media.
Priority y versus other volumes: Configure
g higher
g p
priority
y data
for faster access.
Read-Ahead Policies
Access Bias: a
s
) ha
Identify how data blocks are accessed.
Random versus sequential

I/O Bias: Read versus Write characteristic c om

i c es ide
RAID Level Parity
- s erv t Gu
Standard: Volume is stored across Drive
c s d e n with
o Enclosures
RAID5 protection. p ra Stu
Double: Volume is storedinacross
f e this Drive Enclosures
o@ different
with RAID6 or RAID10
f e r ruprotection
us (for higher availability).
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
The selection
t r a n presented to you in the Oracle FS System Manager will change
choices
u - your choice of QoS type (Single-Tier or Auto-Tier) and your choice of QoS
Mig non
depending on
selection properties (Basic or Advanced).

QoS Properties
The Oracle FS Storage Manager GUI provides two options for the settings for
RAID level and read-ahead policy: Basic (indirect) or Advanced (direct).
Mapping QoS Properties

Initial Storage Initial Basic Advanced
Class Redundancy
Initial typical Initial I/O bias Initial RAID Initial read-
access Level ahead
Capacity disk Double Sequential Read RAID 6 Aggressive
All Others All Others RAID 6 Normal s a

) ha
All other
classes
Single Sequential Read
c om
RAID 5 Aggressive
R d
Random W it
Write RAID 10
i c es Normal
N
i d
l
e
RAIDe5r
v GNormalu
All Others All Others
s o -s ent
r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
You can customize
t r a nthe settings for the RAID level and for the read-ahead policy in the GUI by
u - the Basic approach or the Advanced approach.
Mig non
choosing either
as c You
Basic: ou indirectly
d ect y spec
specify
y tthe
e RAID level
e e aand
d read-ahead
ead a ead po
policy
cy for
o a volume.
o u e Us
Using
g
Basic, you specify the data redundancy, the I/O Bias, and the Access Bias of a LUN.
Advanced: You directly specify the RAID level and read-ahead policy for a volume.

Overall QoS Profile Effect
Key effect per application:

Priority: Affects the number of drives the LUN uses and the
amount of relative Controller CPU resources

Access bias and I/O bias: Affects caching algorithms and
caching
hi element
l t size
i ffor each
h LUN
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Priority F e
l relative
is a n attribute that the system uses to set the importance of and the treatment
u e t r a
- A volume with higher priority than another receives precedence in the
Mig non
of logical volumes.
handling of access requests. Because priority is relative, setting priorities to all high or all low
nullifies the distinction between service levels of volumes.
Requests for I/O on a volume can be biased for Access (sequential, random, or mixed) and
for I/O (read, write, mixed). Use both of these to optimize the performance of the volume.

Access Bias + I/O Bias
Access Bias
Sequential: Reads and writes are mostly sequential.

Random: Reads and writes are mostly random.
Mixed: Reads and writes are partly sequential and random.
I/O Bias
Read: Application is more read intensive.
Write: Application is more write intensive. a
Mixed: Application has a balanced read and write behavior. ) has
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u l reflect
Selections
e - t r anthe most common or the most expected bias for a particular volume.
ig nChoosing
MNote: on Random Access Bias and Write I/O Bias with single redundancy for
data protection creates a volume using RAID 10 (mirrored RAID).
RAID) This RAID level
enhances the write performance but uses twice the capacity.

QoS Changes and Data Migration
Nondisruptive performance tuning

Easy and instant tuning with few clicks
Background Copy and Data Migration

Provides tunable options to migrate data between QoS levels
and
d St
Storage Classes
Cl b
basedd on performance
f and
d system
t iimpactt
Options include:
Minimize Impact
Maximize Speed s a
) ha

System Chooses (default)

c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
Background
-
Copy
t r an and Data Migration selections are used to control the impact on
Mig non
performance
another.
when background tasks need to copy or move data from one location to
Minimize Impact: Restricts the amount of work performed on a loaded system.

This option is intended to have a minimal impact on client I/O throughput at the
expense of longer copy times.
Maximize Speed: Prioritizes the background copy at the expense of client I/O
throughput
System Chooses (default): Balances the background copy with the incoming
client I/O. This option is the default.
Warning: After a QoS migration is started, it cannot be canceled. Consider any
performance impacts carefully in advance.

Creating Single-Tier LUN
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
From the F e
SAN tab,nselect LUNs in the Storage folder to create and view the LUNs on an
u e t r a
Oracle Flash-Storage System. To create a LUN, select the Actions drop-down menu and
Mig non
select Create LUN.
The FS1 calculates whether enough storage resources are available to create a new logical
volume. The GUI provides graphs that represent the storage capacity requirements for the
volume and a second graph that represents the overall system capacity requirements. The
system updates the graphs as you adjust the Quality of Service (QoS) values.

Creating Single-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 1)
Select a Storage Domain.

Give the LUN a name.

Select a Volume Group.
Select a Storage Profile.

Deselect
if not s a
) ha
using a Select a Storage Class (if enabled).
profile.
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o SelectdQoS
e n attributes (if enabled).
p ra Stu
f i n o@Select
e t haismigration priority.
Thin Provisioning
f
Enter
e r ruan InitialuCapacity.
s
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F err ofnService
On thelQuality s fer tab of the Create SAN LUN window, perform the following tasks:
i g e Single
1.uSelect n - tra Tier.
M no
ete
2. Determine e which
c Sto
Storage
age Domain
o a tthe e LUN
U will use
use.
3. Enter a unique name for the LUN in the LUN Name field.
4. Selecting <none> for Volume Group will place the LUN in the default (root) volume
group.
5. Select a Storage Profile. (Default is General Purpose.)
a) If you use the default or select another profile, the QoS values will automatically be set
by the profile.
b) If you deselect
d l t Use
U St Storage P Profile
fil (choose
( h nott to
t use one),
) the
th QoS
Q S fields
fi ld will
ill b
be
enabled for you to enter your own values for the following fields:
Storage Class
RAID Level
Read Ahead
Priority Level
6. Select the Migration/Copy
g py Priority
y from the drop-down
p list. Assign
g the strategy
gy the
system should use for this LUN to control the impact on performance when background
tasks need to copy or move data in the storage pool.
7. Specify the Capacity for the LUN (in GBs).

8. (Optional) Specify the maximum capacity via Allocated Logical Capacity to enable thin
provisioning. If you do not want thin provisioning, set the Allocated Logical Capacity equal to
the assigned Capacity.
Notes
Displayed fields depend on whether Single-Tier or Auto-Tier and Basic or Advanced are
selected and whether you chose not to use a profile or select a profile.
The capacity values displayed in the usage graphs represent the size of the largest volume
that you can create in a particular Storage Class, given one of two performance
configurations.
When the system is idle or lightly loaded, the background task maximizes the amount of work
done regardless of the option selected.
Movement of data during a migration is performed by workers. The workers are memory
structures in the Controller that are populated to send 1 MB requests down to the Drive
Enclosures for a background copy.
For an idle system, 30 worker requests are active no matter which migration priority is a
s
) ha
chosen.
On a loaded system, the number of workers used for each setting is:
1 worker for Minimize Impact c om
12 workers for System Chooses i c es ide
20 workers for the Maximize Speed
- s erv t Gu
You can specify the Storage Domain in which the LUN should
c s d e n In this case, the system
o be created.
uses only those Drive Enclosures that are assigned tora tu If you do not specify a
that domain.
particular domain, the system creates the volume in
pthe S
@ this domain. The Create LUN screen
default
n o
r r ufi useone of which is required while the other two
contains three tabs for entering the LUN information,
are optional.
Quality of Service e l fe e to
u ens
(Required) This tab is m theig c
main idialog box for creating a LUN and is where you configure the
( l
QoS attributes for
u f i noa LUN.a b le your LUN to a volume group and to an administer-defined
Assign
rr sif fany
Storage Domain,
F e er have been defined.
Mapping
e l t r n
aMapping
u -
Migspecification
(Optional) The tab enables you to specify which SAN hosts can access the LUN. This
non can allow access by all hosts (all of which use the same LUN number) or just
certain hosts (each of which can use a different LUN number as specified by the map assigned
to the host).
Data Protection
(Optional) The Data Protection tab enables you to allocate the storage capacity for Clone LUNs.
You can also create a clone schedule to perform data protection at regular intervals.
Clicking OK on the Quality of Service tab creates the LUN using the default settings on the
remaining tabs. You may perform the tasks associated with the other tabs to fine-tune the
remaining LUN properties. The default properties include:
LUN assigned to the default Storage Domain
Host mapping the same as the most recent LUN mapping
Clone repository capacity that is sized to match the Addressable Logical Capacity with no
scheduled automatic cloning taking place

Creating Single-Tier LUN: Mapping Tab (Step 2)
Select Access Protocol. iSCSI disabled in R6

Select host access.

access
Select Controller Assignment.
s a
) ha
If Only selected hosts has been
chosen, you will need to create the
Host mapping.
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Mapping
e tab nis used to assign the LUN to a host.
u e t r a
- the protocols that will have access to the LUN. (Fibre Channel is the supported
Mig1. Choose
non
p otoco for
protocol o R6;
6; iSCSI
SCS will be d
disabled.)
sab ed )
2. Select the type of host mapping:
a. If Only selected hosts is selected, set up host mapping by using the Hosts
Mapped to this LUN section of the page. Click the Create button and select the
host name or WWPNs and a LUN number.
b. If All hosts may access this LUN is selected, choose a LUN number to
present to all hosts.
3. Select the LUNs Controller Assignment.
a. Current Controller: Identifies the current Controller on which the LUN is homed
b. Assigned Controller: Identifies the Controller to which the system should assign
the LUN. Select the Controller on which you want the LUN homed.
Auto-Assign: The system assigns your LUN to an available Controller.

Create Single-Tier LUN: Mapping Tab (Step 2)
s a
) ha
c om
When hosts are mapped
mapped, the bottom portion of the Mapping tab will
i c esdisplay
i d e
- s e v t Gu
each HBA port on the host and its connectivity status to eachrController port.
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
When mapping n hosts to the LUN, the Hosts Mapped to this LUN pane of the
selected
u e t r a
Mapping tab -will display the WWNN of each host HBA port, as well as the connectivity status
Mig non
of each Controller port to the HBA ports.
Notes
When ports are masked, load balancing and failover are unavailable. When you mask a
port, the LUN cannot be accessed from the specified port.
If you use LUN masking or switch zoning and do not use LUN Controller Assignment,
you could create a situation in which a LUN is not exposed on the ports through which
you want the clients to be able to access the LUN. To avoid this situation, assign the LUN
to the Controller on which you have the mapping set.
If network clients are running Windows 2000 or 2003, and you want those clients to
access the LUN, then do not select LUN number 255.

Create Single-Tier LUN: Data Protection (Step 3)
Enable Clone LUN

Select to have the Clones match the

QoS settings of the source LUN.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
ervhere.t Gu
If your Clone uses QoS setting different
-
o dens
than the source LUN select settings
Enable Clone c s
LUN
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The Data F e
Protectionn tab adds protection schedules for creating Clone LUNs and is used to
u e t r a
- space and schedules:
Mig non
configure clone
Allocate space for the Clone LUNs.
Create a clone job schedule, if desired.
The Default Clone repository is sized to match the Addressable Logical Capacity with no
scheduled automatic cloning taking place.
Caution: Oracle strongly recommends that you allocate sufficient Clone repository capacity to
minimize the chances of running out of this space (which could lead to data inconsistency or
loss). To set sufficient capacity, use a value equal to the source volume capacity times the
number of replicas times the maximum rate of change. For example, for a 100 GB volume that
is projected to have 20 active replicas at a time and no more than a 20% rate of change, use
a value of 400 GB for the clone repository.

Data Protection Tab Field Descriptions
Selected Storage Domain Capacity: Displays the capacity of the selected storage
class
Capacity by Storage Class: Displays the capacity of available Storage Classes
Capacity for Clone Storage
Maximum Capacity: Specifies the percentage of space to allocate for clones
Current Maximum Capacity: Specifies the maximum capacity to which the LUN can
grow
Current Available Capacity: The amount of capacity allocated for clones
E i
Estimated
d Maximum
M i Capacity:
C i Estimated
E i d space to allocate
ll ffor clones
l
Estimated Available Capacity: Estimated available capacity for clones
Clone Storage Class (Advanced)
Storage Class: Select the class on which you want the clones to reside. s a
RAID Level: Select the RAID level that you want the clones to have: ) ha
- Single g Parityy = RAID 5 c om
i c es ide
- Double Parity = RAID 6
- s erv t Gu
- irrored = RAID 10
c s o den

p ra Stu
Priority Levels: Select the QoS level (Premium, High, Medium, Low, Archive) you want
applied to the clones.
f i n o@ this
Clone Storage Class (Basic) r r u u s e
Typical Access: Available e l fe etSequential,
methods o
Sequential Random
Random, Mixed
I/O Bias: Availablem i g u
choices n s
eRead, Write, Mixed
( l i c
Redundancy:
u f i noAvailable
a b lelevels Single, Double
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Create Single-Tier LUN: Data Protection (Step 3)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Clonesl can
ebe n created or scheduled automatically.
manually
u e t r a
ig noa njob- schedule automates the creation of clones and should be synchronized with
MCreating
the host applications that access the source LUN so that I/O is quieted before the clone
operation starts.
To see existing clone schedules on the SAN tab, go to Data Protection > Clone Schedules.

Using Create LUN like selected
Source LUNs Name was

New LUN the name
created is NewLUN_1.
QoS attributes are the
s a
same.
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
r u er
F
On thelSAN
ertab, s f
n LUNs in the Storage folder to create and view the LUNs on an Oracle
select
u e t r a
- System. To create a LUN, select the Actions drop-down menu and select
Mig non
Flash Storage
Create LUN.
The FS1 calculates whether enough storage resources are available to create a new logical
volume. The GUI provides graphs that represent the storage capacity requirements for the
volume and a second graph that represents the overall system capacity requirements. The
system updates the graphs as you adjust the Quality of Service (QoS) values.

QoS Plus | Auto-Tier Impact
QoS Plus automatically adapts the location of data block to

optimize storage efficiencies. Data that has a large number of
access requests that are skewed to a relatively small portion of

the user data benefits the most from placement on auto-tiered
LUNs.
LUNs
To create a QoS Plus LUN, select Auto-tier at the top of the
Create SAN LUN dialog box on the Quality of Service tab. The
mechanics of Mapping and Data Protection are the same for as a
Single Tier and Auto-tier. In this section, you will look at the m )h
Quality of Service tab selections.
selections s co
r v i ce uide
When selecting Auto-tier, you configure the initialse settings G for the
o - n t
LUN and then the system will manage the
r a csplacement
t u de of the data
from that point forward. @p is S no e th
u f i
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Create Auto-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 1)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
When you F e
create n Auto-tiered LUN, you select the initial properties for QoS and Storage
an
u e t r a
Class. When-you select a Domain, the Initial Storage Class check box will be enabled
Mig non
providing access to all of the Storage Classes that are associated with that Storage Domain.
Note: Oracle recommends that you should not initially place Auto-tiered LUNs at the fastest
or slowest storage class. For greater efficiency, pick something in the middle and allow QoS
Plus to migrate the data blocks to the appropriate class based on usage.

Create Auto-Tier LUN: Quality of Service Tab (Step 2)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
r u er
F ermigration
To limitl data s f
n use to designated Storage Classes, deselect the Storage Classes that
u e t r a
are not to be-used by using the Additional Options dialog box. QoS Plus is most effective
Mig non
when you use all available Storage Classes.
Note: If the preferred Storage Class is full, data might be placed temporarily in a
nonpreferred Storage Class.

Data Migration
Data migration, which results from QoS Plus, occurs when the
system, after an analysis of the historical usage information of a
block of data, determines that another Storage Class or RAID

level can better service that block (640 KB block) of data.
QoS Plus will move frequently accessed data blocks to a faster
Storage Class, such as performance SSDs. Conversely, it will
move infrequently accessed data blocks to a slower Storage
Class, such as capacity HDDs. a
) has
Data migration will also occur when adding, moving, or removing om
c
Drive Groups to/from a Domain.
Domain When adding DrivecGroups
i es ideto a
domain, you have the option to rebalance the existing
- s erv t volumes.
G u
Rebalance is the default setting. c s o den
a p r S tu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Storagel F e
Domains nmust have sufficient capacity for volumes when removing Drive Groups.
u e t r a
ig adding,
MWhen n o n- moving, or removing to/from Drive Groups, the FS1 will use the migration
settings for the Domain to determine the priority for background migration.

Disabling Data Migration
You can temporarily disable data migration at both the Storage Domain
and LUN levels. Disabling data migration at the Storage Domain level
halts all migration on all Auto-tiered LUNs in that Domain. To halt data
migration at the LUN level deselect Tier Reallocation Enabled in the
Additional Options dialog.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Disabling Tier Reallocation
To temporarily disable
tier reallocation at the
Storage Domain level,

go to System tab >
Storage Domains.
Then double-click the
domain name to open
the Modify Storage
Domain dialog box and s a
deselect Enable Tier ) ha
Reallocation. c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
DisablingF e
tier n
reallocation stops data migration between storage tiers for the entire domain.
u e t r a
Temporarily -disabling tier reallocation can be done at both the domain and individual LUN
Mig non
level.

Customizing Auto-Tier Scans
You may need to optimize the frequency with which the system scans
the data patterns for auto-tier LUNs. This is done at the Domain level.
Click the lock icon to

unlock/lock access to
the Scan Options.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
A shorter time span increases
n o the is of scans
@ thnumber
r r u i migration.
resulting in frequent fdata
u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You can l F e
specify n interval for when auto-tier moves frequently accessed data blocks and
the
u e - t r a
Mig non
infrequently accessed data blocks to match your application activity. Adjusting the auto-tier
scans might affect the efficiency of QoS Plus. Use caution before adjusting the scan options.

Changing the Tiering on a LUN
Auto-Tier Single Tier

When changing an Auto-Tiered LUN to a Single Tiered LUN the

data will be migrated back to the initial Storage Class based on
the Migration Priority.
Single Tier Auto-Tier

When changing a Single Tiered LUN to an Auto-Tiered LUN, data
a
analysis will determine the migration of data across all tiers
) h as
designated via the Additional Options on the Quality of
Service tab in the Modify SAN LUN dialog. c om
s
r v ice uide
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Host
M
Mapping
i
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Visibility: Host-LUN Mapping or LUN-Host Mapping
The following
g screenshot shows the mapping
pp g pproperties
p between the SAN
hosts and the LUNs:
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The slideF e
also showsn the status of the connections between the hosts and the associated
u e - t r a
Mig non
Controller ports.

Managing SAN Host Groups
s a
A Host Group is a collection of SAN hosts that the system manages as a ) ha
group, which simplifies the task of associating hosts to LUNs. Host Groups
c om
can be
b useful
f l if you h
have SAN hhostt clusters,
l t each
h off which teis many
hi h contains
c e
v i i d
SAN hosts. Use Hosts Groups to map LUNs to a specified ergroup.
-s ent G
u
s o
c tud
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l have
Host groups
t r a nthe following properties:
u - belong to only one host group.
Mig A host
n oncan
You can map unlimited hosts to a host group group.
A host group can have zero or more mappings.
You can map a LUN to either a host or a host group.
If a host group has mappings, all hosts in the host group have all of the mappings of the
host group, but any given host may also have other mappings. No mappings may conflict
with other mappings.
When assigning a host with mappings to a host group without mappings, you are
prompted to migrate mappings on the host to the host group. Migrating these mappings
make them available to all hosts in the group, not just the single host.

Managing Host Groups
First
st create
c eate the Host
a host
ost g
group,
oup,
Group, then hosts
then assign assigntohosts
the
to the group.
group.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
After the F e
host group n is created and hosts assigned, you can map your LUNs to the host group.
u e - t r a
Mig non

Configuring a SAN Host
To configure a SAN host:

1. View the SAN hosts.

2. Create a LUN.
3 Configure and map a LUN to a host (or WWPN)
3. WWPN).
4. Partition a LUN.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Configuring a LUN on a Windows Host
To configure a LUN on a Windows server:
1. On the Windows host:
1. Install the HBA.
2. Install and configure the HBA Driver.

3. Install FSPM. (This is recommended and may require a reboot.)
4
4. Create a Windows
Windows-to-FS1
to FS1 zone and add it to the current
ZoneSet.
2. On the FS1:
1. Verify Windows host connectivity.
s a
2. Create and configure a LUN. ) ha
3. On the Windows host: c om
1. Verify the visibility of the LUN. i c es ide
s e rv Gu
2. Write a Signature on the disk.
c s o dent
-
3. Create a partition. p ra Stu
4. Create a filesystem.
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Configuring a LUN on a UNIX Host
To configure a LUN on a UNIX host

1. On the Unix host:
1. Install the HBA.

2. Install and configure the HBA Driver.
3. Install FSPM. ((This is recommended and may
y require
q a reboot.))
2. On the FS1:
1. Verify UNIX host connectivity.
2. Create and configure a LUN.
s a
3. On the Unix host: (Solaris 10 example)
m) ha
1. Fun devfsadm to scan for new disks s co
2. Reboot or run luxadm to recognize the LUN. r v ice uide
3. If desired, run format to partition the o - se nt G
LUN.
a c s ude
4. Run newfs to create a filesystem
p r on each
S t partition.
5.
@
Mount the filesystem(s).fino e th
is
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Data
P t ti
Protection
Clone and
Copy
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

SAN Clone and Copy
Clone LUN and
Cl d Copy
C LUN to
t generate t separate
t copies
i off
volumes for storage, application testing, and staging
Clone LUN Copy LUN
Source Target Source Target
Point-in-Time Read-write, LUN-based snapshot Block-level copy with configurable QoS
Method Description Capacity usage

s a
Clone LUN Creates a readable and writeable Consumes system space ) ha
point-in-time copy of a LUN om
allocated for clones; stores only
c
i c es ide
changes to the source or clone
v Gu
erfree
- s n t from
Copy LUN
(volume write copy of a LUN. QoS attributes for ac so capacity
Creates a block-level, full-image, read- Consumes
system
u d e space
that is equal to
copy) a LUN copy can differ from the QoSp r t
S size of the LUN
the current
o @ h i s
attributes of the original.
r u fin se t
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
The FS1
e l system
t r a n native and add-on data-protection and replica tools.
has
u - is a point-in-time copy of a LUN that is intended to snap (split) from the
Mig Clone
non
LUN
sou ce LUN
source U foro immediate
ed ate read-write
ead te use.
use An immediate
ed ate snapshot
s aps ot o
of a LUN
U cacan be
created. Clone LUNs utilize partial-block snapshot technology. Clone LUNs have the
same initial QoS parameters as the source LUN. After the clone is created, the priority
setting and location of the clone can be changed.
Copy LUN (or volume copy) is a block-level (image copy) of a LUN.
The FS Storage System uses decimal units to calculate capacities. For example:
1 MB = 10242 (1,048,576) bytes
1 GB = 10243 (1,073,741,824) bytes
1 TB = 10244 (1,099,511,627,776) bytes
Important! Make sure that the clone space does not fill up, consuming the maximum amount
of space allocated. Oracle strongly recommends that you monitor the amount of space
available and modify the volume to allocate more clone space as needed. If clone space fills
up, clones will g
go inconsistent and will need to be deleted.

Managing Clone LUNs
Features:
Partial-block copy
NewLUN NewLUN-Clone
Can split target from source LUN
Block Cache
Readable and writable QoS = High Service QoS = High
Can be performed on demand or scheduled Source Target
For example, NewLUN is the

source and
NewLUN_3.21.2015_19.00.00.761
is a clone.
Nested Clone LUNs are dependent
on the parent Clone LUN.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
Modify source
p ra Stu
LUN to allocate
Clone LUN f i n o@ this
space. r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Clonesl use
epartial-block
n copy technology that requires no cache and minimal disk storage
u e t r a
- are instantaneous and highly efficient. A clone can be created at any time.
Mig non
space. Clones
Clones can be manually created or scheduled automatically.
Clones copy only data that has been modified. This allows the FS1 to use the modified data in
the clone and the unmodified data from the source LUN.
When accessing a clone on a host, the source LUN and target clone LUN should not be
mounted on the same Windows hosts because both LUNs have the same disk signature,
which will lead to stolen identity issues.

Copy LUN (Volume Copy)
Features:
LUN to LUN copy
Block-level replica
Can split target from source
Can changeg QoS or target
g ((copy)
py) Block Cache
S
Service
i
Readable and writable
s a
) ha
c om
LUN
i c es idLUN
e
Source
- s erv t Gu Copy
s
QoS = Med
c o den QoS = High
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Copy LUN F e
is n
a point-in-time, block-for-block replica of the source LUN. This copy can be used
u e - t r a
Mig non
for backup, testing, reporting, or data warehousing. LUN copies are readable and writeable. A
LUN copy consumes its own storage capacity.
LUN copies are made to a new volume, which can have different QoS settings (performance
and redundancy) than the source LUNs.

Restoring from a Clone
Restore copies the data set from the Clone back onto the
original LUN.
Changes written to the Clone will also be copied to original

LUN.
The
Th background
b k d copy physically
h i ll moves d data
t bback k tto original.
i i l
Note that a restore from a Clone of a Clone still modifies the
original LUN; not the Clone that was its source. a
s
) ha
Restore from Clone c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p a Stu
rOriginal
Clone LUN
o@ Source s
thiLUN
f i n e
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
You canl restore an
a LUN to its state when the Clone LUN was created. Restoring a LUN from a
u e t r
- in returning the LUN to the exact point-in-time image of the clone, plus any
Mig non
Clone LUN results
changes made to the clone. Restoring from the clone allows access to the data while the
restore is in progress.

Growing a Clone or Copy
Both Clones and Copies can have their Logical Capacity

increased.
Data in the address range greater than the capacity of the

source at the time the snapshot was taken is zero.
s a
Clone LUN Copy LUN ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
Source Target Source so
c d e n Target
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Lesson Summary
After completing this lesson, you should have learned to:

Describe the FS system SAN features and topology
Explain the need for multi-pathing software

Provision single tiered storage
Provision auto-tiered storage
Convert LUNs from single to auto and from auto to single
Manage SAN hosts a
) has
Create and manage Clone LUNs o m
Create
C t and d manage LUN C Copies
i e s c
ic de rv Gui
s e
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1 What
1. Wh is
i LUN mapping?
i ?
2. Describe Active/Active, Asymmetric LUN Access.
s a
) ha
3. List the benefits of using FSPM.
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
4. What does it mean when a host is shown as Hostname
p ra StUnknown
u in the Storage >
Hosts window of the Oracle FS System o
n @ this
Manager?
r u f i s e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
o ( e li
5. How are Clone f i n
LUN a b
and
lCopy LUN different?
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
6. Where do you get the FSPM software?
7 Where
7. Wh d
do you iinstall
t ll th
the FSPM software?
ft ?

Practice
4-1: Provision a Windows 2008 LUN without FSPM

4-2: Provision a Windows 2008 LUN with FSPM
4-3: Provision an OEL 6 LUN

4-4: Provision a Solaris 10 LUN
4-5: Thin Provisioning Exercise
4-6: Clone LUN Operation
4-7: Restore from Clone LUN s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Note: Depending non the number of students in the class, you may be sharing an FS1-2
u e t r a
- students. Configuring the FS1-2 system settings should be performed by a
Mig non
system with other
single administrator. To prevent configuration conflicts, consult with your instructor to
determine if you are sharing your assigned FS1-2 system.
If you ARE sharing the training environment with other students, this lab should be performed
as a team.
IMPORTANT! Refer to the Lab Environment Information for details on your assigned lab
equipment. If you have not been assigned a system, consult with your instructor.

Practice 4-1
Provision a Windows 2008 LUN Without FSPM
Overview
In this practice, you create a SAN LUN, map it to your assigned Windows host, and
configure the host systems to use the LUN created. You will see how the LUN is presented
on the host system without FSPM installation. You then install FSPM and remap the LUN.
Purpose
1. This exercise is to re-enforce the benefit of and need for installing FSPM on connected
host systems for which SAN LUNs will be provisioned.
s a
2. This exercise will demonstrate how to remap LUNs when installing FSPM after LUNs
have been created and provisioned to host systems without FSPM. )h a
c om
A
Assumptions
ti
i c es ide
1. Make sure your instructor has assigned a lab system tosyou;
- ervin most
t G ucases, you will
have a lab partner. c s o den
2. FSPM is not preinstalled on your Windows@ prahost;
2008 S
if
tituis, uninstall it.
f i n o
e this
Create an alias for your Windows rHost
f e ru us
l t o
1. On your assigned FS1, navigate
i g ue entosSAN e > Storage > Hosts.
o (m e lic
2. From the Actions f i a b l menu, select Associate Hosts.
n drop-down
u
rr sfer
F e
3.igu el Win01
Enter - t r anin the Host Name: field.
M non
4. In the Create Association section, click Select from discovered WWNs. A list with
WWNs will appear in the lower part of the Create Association section.
5. From this list of WWNs, locate the two WWNs associated with your assigned Windows
2008 host. (Find the WWNs for the FC HBA in Appendix A Lab Environment.) Select
g to add each one to the Associations
each WWN, and click the Add button at the right
field.
6. Click OK. Note that the name Win01 has now been associated with the FC HBA WWNs
on the Windows 2008 host.

Create a SAN LUN to map to your Windows Host
1. On your assigned FS1, navigate to SAN > Storage > LUNs.
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Create LUN.

3. In the Create SAN LUN dialog box, on the Quality of Service tab, configure the
following parameters, leaving all other parameters at their default values:
Select in upper left: Single Tier

(if available) Storage Domain: Select the appropriate Domain for Capacity
Disk.
LUN Name: <name>winlun1
s a
Volume Group: Select the one you created or <none>. )h a
Use Storage Profile: Deselect the check box next to the drop-down
m
co list.
s
Storage Class: Capacity Disk r v ice uide
RAID Level: Double Parity o - se nt G
Read Ahead: Normal r a cs tude
@ p is S
Priority Level: Medium
f i n o th
u us e
err Chooses
Migration/Copy Priority: System
l f e to
e
gu cens
m i
Capacity: 100(GB
o l e li
i n
uf Logical
Allocated abCapacity (GB): 200 GB
r r f e r
e l Fe rans
4.i gClick o -t
u thenMapping tab and verify that the following parameters have the given values.
M n
The Mapping tab lets you specify the host on which the LUN will be consumed
consumed.
Access Protocol: Fibre Channel (deselect iSCSI)
Only selected hosts (via maps) = Select
LUN Controller Assignment
Assigned Controller CU = <auto assign>
5. On the bottom-left of the Mapping tab, click the Create button to map the LUN to your
Windows host. In the Create LUN Map dialog box, configure the following parameters:
Host Name: Win01
LUN Number: Select any available LUN number. Note the #_______
6. Click the OK button. Verify that the specified host appears in the Hosts Mapped to this
LUN section of the Mapping tab.

We will skip the Data Protection tab for this practice.
7. Click the OK button in the Create SAN LUN dialog box to begin creation of the LUN.
8. After the LUN is configured, the Status column will show Online in the SAN > Storage
> LUN context window. Verify that the Host Access column displays Mapped.
View LUN on your Windows Host

1 Connect
1. C t tto your Windows
Wi d h
host.
t
2. Open the Computer Management utility (Start > Administrative Tools > Computer
Management). sa ha
)
c om
3 Select Disk Management (in Storage)
3. Storage ) to locate the LUN. s eand Convert
LUN If theeInitialize
c
Wizard starts, cancel it. i
rv Guid
s e
c s o- dent
4. A list of available disks (formatted and unformatted) p ra is Sdisplayed.
tu If your LUN is not
o @ t h i s
shown, from the Actions menu, select
r u f inRescan
s e Disks. After the disk rescan, all the
LUNs that are created on the FS1
l f er and tmapped
o u to this host will appear in the bottom-
right
i ht pane.
i g ue ense
o (m e lic
f i nare now a b l (4) new unallocated disks displayed, right-click the box to
5. Note that therer
rtheu f r
e(wherefour
l F
the left e
of pane
n s the disk number, size, and status are listed) and select
u e
Properties r a
-t from the context menu for each of the four (4) new disks.
M i g o n
n
Warning: Do NOT initialize or format these disks.
6. On the properties screen, the LUN number is listed. Verify that each new disk matches
the LUN number assigned on the FS1 system.
Note: The four (4) new disks represent the single LUN created on the FS1. There are
four shown, one for each path back to the FS1 and two paths to each Controller: one
optimized and the other nonoptimized. Installing FSPM will consolidate the four disks
(paths) back to one disk on the host. That will be your next task.
7 Click Cancel to close the Properties dialog box and minimize the Computer
7.
Management window.

Install the Flash Storage Path Manager on the Windows host
Note: Depending on the FS1 Software version and the behavior of the FS1 and host, the
results of the following steps may vary. Check with your instructor if you have problems
completing this portion of the practice successfully.
1. On your Windows host, locate the FSPM installation package (example, fspm-
) Double-click the installation p
4.0.0.x86.msi). package
g and follow the installation wizard to
set up FSPM.
2. Click Yes to restart the host system. (Do not shut down.) a
s
) ha
3. After the host system has completed the restart, verify that FSPM isc om
installed
s
successfully by going to Control Panel > Programs. ice de
rv Gui
s e
c s o- dent
4. Return to Computer Management > Disk Management
p ra Stuand note that the four (4) disks
have disappeared. (In some cases, a single
n o @disktwill
h isbe displayed in place of the four.)
Rescan to verify that all mapped disks
r r ufi display.
u s e
e l fe e to
5. Next remap the LUNm
u ens
onigthe FS1.
o ( e lic
u f i n abl
e r GUIfeand
rFS1 r
6. OpenF
l the
a n s navigate on the SAN tab to Storage > Hosts. At this point, the
g u e
previously r
-tassociated Win01 host should have been replaced by the real host name
i o n
M withnthe same WWNs associated. (See Appx. A for the real host name.) The
connection should indicate Connected and Communicating. This verifies that FSPM is
communicating between the host and the FS1.
6. On the FS1, navigate to Storage > LUNs and check the Host Access on the your LUN.
At this point, it should indicate No Mappings confirming that the LUN has lost access to
the host.
7. To restore access, double-click the LUN to open the Modify SAN LUN dialog box and
return to the Mapping tab. Note that the host mapping that was previously configured in
the lower half of the dialog box is now gone.

8. Redo the mapping from the top as before:

Assigned Controller CU = Select a Controller
9. On the bottom-left of the Mapping tab, click the Create button to map the LUN to your
Windows host. In the Create LUN Map dialog box, configure the following parameters:
Host Name: <your assigned Windows host>
LUN Number: Select any available LUN number. Note the #_______
s a
) ha
10. Click the OK button. Verify that the specified host appears in the Hosts
c om
Mapped to this
LUN section
ti off the
th Mapping
M i t b
tab. ce s e
s e rvi Guid
s o - ent
11. Return to your assigned host and verify that a disk
r c ud representing the LUN
a nowSappears
t
you just remapped. p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
12 Right-click
12. Right click the box to the left e l fethe pane
of e to(where the disk number
number, size,
size and status are
i
listed) and select Properties. g u Note e n s that there is a new tab displayed (MPIO); click this
( m
o arebfour l i c
tab. Note that there
f i n l e (4) active paths from this disk to the FS1. Click Cancel.
e r ru fera
l F the a n s
g u e
13. Right-click- t r box again and select Online. Right-click the box again and select initialize
i o n
M Disk.nAccept the defaults by clicking OK.
14. Right-click the right portion of the new disk (where it shows Unallocated) to start the
New Simple Volume Wizard. Accept the defaults to perform a quick format by clicking
Next, and then Finish.
The New Volume is now ready for use.

use
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 4-1. If you have any questions about this
practice, ask you instructor.

Practice 4-2
Provision a Windows 2008 LUN with FSPM
Overview
In this practice, you create and configure a SAN LUN and map it to your assigned Windows
host, and configure the host systems to use the LUN created. This practice demonstrates
the ease of provisioning SAN LUNs with FSPM installed.
Assumptions
Make sure your instructor has assigned a lab system to you; in most cases, you will have a
lab partner. a
) has
Create a SAN LUN to map p to your
y Windows Host c om
i c es ide
1. Navigate to SAN > Storage > LUNs.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Create p ra LUN. S tu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
3. O
3 On tthee Qua
Quality ty oof Se
Service ce tab,
e l feco guto
configure
e e the
t e following
o o g parameters,
pa a ete s, leaving
ea g alla ot
other
e
parameters at their default u
ig icen
values: s
o ( m l
i n l e
b Single Tier
r
Select r uinf upper
f e r aleft:
e l Feavailable)
(if r a n s Storage Domain: Select the appropriate Domain for Capacity
i g u
o n -t
Disk.
M n
LUN N Name: <name>winlun2
< > i l 2
Volume Group: Select the one you created or <none>.
Use Storage Profile: Deselect the box in front of the drop-down field
Initial Storage Class: Capacity Disk
Select Basic
Typical Access: Mixed
I/O Bias: Mixed
Redundancy: Double
Migration/Copy Priority: System Chooses
Capacity: 300 GB
Allocated Logical Capacity (GB): 300 GB

4. Click the Mapping tab and verify that the following parameters have the given values.
Assigned Controller CU = <auto assign>
5. At the bottom left of the Mapping tab, click the Create button to map the LUN to your
assigned Windows host. In the Create LUN Map dialog box, configure the following
parameters:
Host Name: (Your assigned Windows Host)
LUN Number: Select any available LUN number.
s a
6. Click the OK button. Verify that the specified host appears in the Hosts m ) ha
Mapped to this
c o
pp g tab.
LUN section of the Mapping s c e ide
i
- s erv t Gu
7. On the Data Protection tab select Enable Clones,sset
c e n
o thedMaximum Capacity to 120%,
which should provide 360GB Maximum Capacity p r a(LUNS +t u
Clone space shared). Select
Match Repository QoS to LUN QoS. o@ this
r u fin se
l f er to u
8. Click the OK button in theuCreate
g e nSAN se LUN dialog box to begin creation of the LUN.
i
(m e lic e
f i o
n configured,
b l
r r
9. After the LUN u is
f e r a the Status column will show Online in the SAN > Storage
e
l Fcontext
> LUN s
nwindow, and the Host Access column will show Mapped.
u e - t r a
Mig non
Vi
View LUN on your Windows
Wi d Host
H t
1. Log in to your Windows host.
2. Open the Computer Management utility (Start > Administrative Tools > Computer
Management).
3. Select Disk Management (in Storage) to locate the LUN. If the Initialize and Convert
Wizard starts, cancel it.
4. A list of available disks (formatted and unformatted) is displayed. If your LUN is not
shown, from the Actions menu, select Rescan Disks. After the disk rescan, all the
LUNs on the FS1 that have been mapped to this host will appear in the bottom-right
pane.

5. To determine which disk is the LUN that you created, right-click the gray box to the left
of the pane (where the disk number, size, and status are listed) and select Properties
from the context menu.
menu
6. On the properties screen, the LUN number is listed. Verify that it matches the LUN
number you assigned to the LUN on the FS1 system. Click Cancel.
g
7. Right-click the box again
g and select Online. Right-click
g the box again
g and select initialize
Disk, and accept the defaults by clicking OK.
8. Right-click the right portion of the new disk (where it shows Unallocated) to start the
a
New Simple Volume Wizard. Accept the defaults to perform a quick format by a s
selecting
Next then Finish. m )h
o c
e s
r v ic uide
The New Volume is now ready for use. e
-s ent G
s o
c tud
r a
p is S
o @
n 4-2. th
Congratulations! You have completed r u f i
Practice e
s If you have any questions about this
f e r o u
instructor. el
practice ask you instructor
practice, e t
u
ig icen s
o ( m l
i n l e
r r uf ferab
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n

Practice 4-3
Provision an OEL 6 LUN
Overview
In this practice, you install the OEL FSPM software on your assigned OEL host, create and
configure a SAN LUN, and map it to your assigned OEL host system configure the host
systems to use the LUN created.
Assumptions
lab partner. a
) has
g Path Manager
Install the Flash Storage g c om
i c es ide
1. Log in to your assigned OEL host and locate the FSPM installation
- s erv t Gpackage
OEL: oracle.com-fspm-4.0.1-1.i486.rpm, or oracle.com-fspm-4.0.0.1.x86_64.rpm).
u (example,
c s o den
p ra Stu
2. Install FSPM by using the rpm command,
f i n o@
e thisin the following example:
as shown
f e r ru us
l t o
# rpm Uvh oracle.com-fspm-4.0.1-1.x86_64.rpm
i g ue ense
3. Restart the host o (m (Do
system. e
c shut down.)
linot
fin rab l
r u
l F er nsfe
i g - trasystem has completed a restart, verify that FSPM is communicating with
ue thenhost
4. After
o
M yournassigned FS1-2 system. To do this, in the Oracle FS System Manager, navigate on
th SAN tab
the t b to
t Storage
St > Hosts.
H t
5. Verify that the OEL host is listed in the Host Name field and that both World Wide Port
Names (WWPNs) are shown.
Create a SAN LUN to map to your OEL Host

2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Create LUN.

3. On the Quality of Service tab, configure the following parameters, leaving all other
parameters at their default values:
Select in upper
pp left: Single
g Tier
(if available) Storage Domain: Select the appropriate Domain for Capacity
Disk.
LUN Name: <student#>oellun

Storage Profile: General Purpose
Initial Storage
g Class: Capacity
p y Disk
Initial RAID Level: Double Parity
Initial Read Ahead: Normal
a
Migration/Copy Priority: System Chooses as )h
m
co
Capacity: 600 GB s
Allocated Logical Capacity (GB): 600 GB r v ice uide
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
4. Click the Mapping tab and verify that the following
@ p iparameters
s S have the given values.
The Mapping tab lets you specify the ihost
u f no onewhich
th the LUN will be consumed.
f us
rr to (deselect
Access Protocol: FibreeChannel iSCSI)
Only selected hosts l
ue (via se = Select
maps)
i g e n
(m Assignment
LUN Controller
o e lic
Assigned b l
fin raController CU = <auto assign>
r r u f e
e l Fe rans
5.igAt o n -t left of the Mapping tab, click the Create button to map the LUN to your
u the bottom
M OELnhost. In the Create LUN Mapp dialogg box,, configure g the followinggpparameters:
Host Name: (OEL Host or the OEL Host HBA Port1 WWN)
7. We will skip the Data Protection tab for this practice.
8. Click the OK button in the Create SAN LUN dialog box.

> LUN context window.
10 Note
10. N t the
th LUID number
b att th
the ffar right_____________________________________.
i ht
View LUN on your OEL Host

1. Log in to your OEL host.
2 Use
2. U fdisk l to
fdi k -l t verify
if that
th t the
th LUN iis seen b
by th
the OS
OS.
Note: If the LUID above is not listed in the fdisk output, execute a sync and reboot
your OEL host, making sure that other students are not using this host. Run fdisk
s a
again. Note the device path for the LUN associated with port 0 of the HBA:) h
a
______________________ c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
3. Use the multipath -ll command to view all LUN
c s oIDs. den
p ra Stu
n is
o@LUN.thUse
4. The multipathing software is controlling
r u f i the
s e the multipath command to flush
the LUN ID of your LUN from the r
fe multipatht u
o device map. This is required to allow the
e l e
m i gu cemounted.
new file system to be manually ns Now execute
# multipath f o ( <LUID
l e li # of your LUN> (for example, 2000b080001001481)
i n
uf ferab
r
e nsr
e l
5. Create Fan EXT2
r a file system on your LUN. Because there is no partition table on the
u - t
MigLUN,nthe
on file system will use the entire LUN. Execute:
# mkfs
kf /dev/<your
/d / d
dev ID> (f example,
(for l /dev/sda)
/d / d )
6. Create a directory to use as a mount point and mount the LUN.

# mkdir /mnt/<name>oellun
# mount /dev/sdx /mnt/<name>oellun
7. Use the df -k command to verify that the file system is mounted. The file system is
now available for use.
practice, ask you instructor.

Practice 4-4
Provision a Solaris 10 LUN
Overview
In this practice, you install the Solaris FSPM software on your assigned Solaris host, create
and configure a SAN LUN and map it to your assigned Solaris host system, and configure
the host systems to use the LUN created.
Assumptions
lab partner. a
) has
Install the Flash Storage g Path Manager g c om
i c es ide
1. Log in to your assigned Solaris host as root and locate therv
(for example, FSPM-i386-4.0.1.pkg, or FSPM-sparc-4.0.1.pkg). - s e FSPM t Ginstallation
u package
c s o den
p ra Stu
2. Install FSPM by using the pkgadd command, n is in the following example:
o@ asthshown
ru f i e
f e r t o us
l
ue ense
i g
# pkgadd d FSPM-i386-4.0.1.pkg
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
3. Restart e
F
the f er (Do not shut down.)
rr hostssystem.
u e l
- t r an
M4.igAfternthe
onhost system has completed a restart, verify that FSPM is communicating with
your assigned FS1-2 system. To do this in the Oracle FS System Manager, navigate on
the SAN tab to Storage > Hosts.
5. Verify that the Solaris host is listed in the Host Name field and that both World Wide
Port Names (WWPNs) are shown.
Create a SAN LUN to map to your Solaris Host

2 From the Actions drop-down

2. drop down menu,
menu select Create LUN
LUN.

3. In Create SAN LUN on the Quality of Service tab, configure the following parameters,
leaving all other parameters at their default values:
Select in upper left: Auto-Tier

Auto Tier
(if available) Storage Domain: Select the appropriate Domain for Performance
Disk.
LUN Name: <name>sollun

Storage Profile: General Purpose
Initial Storage Class: Performance Disk will be pre-selected
Initial RAID Level: Single Parity will be pre-selected
Initial Read Ahead: Normal will be pre-selected
s a
Priority Level: Medium will be pre-selected
) h a
Migration/Copy Priority: System Chooses co m
c e s e
Capacity: 200 GB s e rvi Guid
s o - ent
Allocated Logical Capacity (GB): 200 GB ra c tud
p S
f i n o@ this
4. Click the Mapping tab and verifyrthat r u e parameters have the given values.
u the following
s
The Mapping tab lets you specifye l fe thee host
to on which the LUN will be consumed
consumed.
i g u ens
(m eFibre
Access Protocol:
o lic Channel (deselect iSCSI)
Only fiselected l
n abhosts (via maps) = Select
r u
r Controller
f er Assignment
F e LUN s
u e l
- t r an
Mig non Assigned Controller CU = <auto assign>
5. At the bottom left of the Mapping tab, click the Create button to map the LUN to your
Solaris host. In the Create LUN Map dialog box, configure the following parameters:
Host Name: (Solaris Host or the Solaris Host HBA Port1 WWN)
We will skip the Data Protection tab for this practice.

8. Click the OK button in the Create SAN LUN dialog box.
> LUN context
t t window.
i d
10. Note the LUID number at the far right_____________________________________.
Vi
View LUN on your Solaris
S l i Host
H t
1. Log in to your Solaris host.
a
) h as
1. If the drive does not appear on the host within a couple minutes, run the following
command to discover the new LUN: m
s co
r v i ce uide
# devsfadm c disk (scans the SCSI bus for new disks)
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
4. If the drive does not appear after running the @ pdevsadm
i s Scommand, restart the host.
o
fin se t h
r u
5 Use format to verify that the
5. l f
LUN
er is visible
t o u
from your Solaris host and to accept the
g u e nse
default partitioning. m
( i i c e
# format fino le l
u a b
. Ferr s f er
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
.
format > partition (to access the partition
partition submenu)
.
.
format > print (Displays the partition table. The size of partition 2 should be the
same as the size of the LUN you created on the FS1.)
.
.
format > quit
.
.
format > quit
#

6. Create a UNIX file system on partition (slice) 2 of your LUN. Slice 2 represents the
entire disk. Execute:
# newfs v /dev/rdsk/<LUID#>
(See the output of the format command,
command for example,
example
c4t000B080000001481d0s2.)
7. Create a directory to use as a mount point and mount the new file system on the
directory.
# mkdir /mnt/<name>sollun
# mount /dev/dsk/<LUID#> /mnt/<name>sollun
8. Use df to verify that the file system is mounted.

# df k /dev/dsk/<LUID#>
s a
) ha
The file system
y is now available for use. c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 4-4. If you
c s n questions about
o havedeany
this practice, ask you instructor. p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 4-5
Thin Provisioning Exercise
Overview
In this practice, you copy data to a thinly provisioned LUN to observe the effects of Thin
Provisioning.
A
Assumptions
ti
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1 system for your team.
s a
) ha
Thin Provisioning Exercise
c om
1 Return
1. R t to
t the
th Oracle
O l FS System
S t M
Manager and
d navigate s page.
i t tto SANc>eLUNs
LUN e For
F
<name>winlun1 mapped to the Windows host, note the e r i
following u i d
v Ginformation:
o - s nt
Capacity (GB)_____________
a s
c tude
Allocated Logical Capacity (GB)_____________
r
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
f e rr to us
2 Return to your Windows host.
2. host l Right
Right-click
ueassociated s eclickwith
My Computer and select Manage > Disk
Management. For theidisk
m g c e n <name>winlun1, note the formatted
( l i
storage available:
u f i no able
F e rr sfer
(GB)_______________
How
u e l does tthis
- r ancompare to the associated capacity on the FS1?______________
Mig non
__________________________________________________________________
3. Open the associated drive using Windows Explorer by right-clicking the drive letter and
selecting Open.
4. Create two (2) folders named Copy1 and Copy2.
5. Locate the LabFiles folder on the desktop. Copy (do not move) the entire LabFiles
folder to the new Copy1 folder.

6. Return to the Oracle FS Storage Manager and the SAN > LUNs screen. It may take
some time for the screen to refresh. Select the Tools drop-down menu and click
Configure Automatic Screen Updates to open the dialog box. Check to make sure
p
that screen updates are enabled.
Was there a change in Total Capacity? ________

If so, how?___________________
7. Return to your Windows host and repeat step 5 copying LabFiles to the Copy2
folder.
s a
8. Return to your FS1 and repeat step 6. ) ha
c om
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Was there a change in Total Capacity? ________
- s
o den
c s
If so, how?___________________ p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
Congratulations!
g pfe Practice
You have completed
l to 4-5. If yyou have anyy questions
q about
this practice, ask your instructor. e
gu cens e
m i
( e li
f i n o b l
u
rr sfer a
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 4-6
Clone LUN Operation
Overview
In this practice, you will create a text file and save it on the drive associated with a LUN.
You will then perform a Clone LUN operation and confirm the existence and contents of the
newly created text file. You will then make modifications to the original text file and observe
g did not migrate
that the changes g to the clone.
Assumptions
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1 system for your team.a
) has
Clone LUN Operation
p c om
i c essomei d e
1. Create a text file on <name>winlun2. Edit the document entering
s e rv Gu text, and then
save and close.
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
2. Open the Oracle FS System Managerin
f o@
and thisto SAN > LUNs.
navigate
e
f e r ru us
l
e and t o
e Clone.
3. Right-click the associated i g uLUN e n sselect
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
rr SAN
4. In the Create
e f r LUN dialog box, set or change the following parameters on
eClone
l F
theeQuality of
s
anService tab:
u - t r
Mig non
LUN Name: Use the default (Clone of <name>winlun2)
Capacity: Leave as is
Host mapped to this LUN
5. On the Mapping tab, use the same settings that you used for the source LUN.

6. Verify that the Clone LUN was created and is associated with your source LUN.
7. Use My Computer on the host to see how the Clone LUN was presented to the
Wi d
Windows h
host.
t
8. Edit the original text file (not on the Clone) and add some text. Now view the file on
the Clone LUN. Is there a difference when compared with the original?
9 Return to the FS1 GUI and navigate to SAN > LUNs

9. LUNs. Double-click
Double click the clone to open
the Modify SAN LUN dialog box.
thea
10. Click the Mapping tab and remove the mapping to the Windows host by clicking s
Windows host name, and then clicking the Remove button. )h a
c om
11. Verify on the Windows host in My Computer that the LUN isrvno
es ibeing
iclonger d e
presented to the host. - s e t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Congratulations! You have completed Practice s have any questions about
o@4-6.thIf iyou
f i n e
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 4-7
Restore from Clone LUN
Overview
In this practice, you create several Clone LUNs, changing data between each clone
operation. You then restore from a specified Clone LUN.
A
Assumptions
ti
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1 system for your team.
Restore from Clone LUN s a

) ha
1. In the Oracle FS System Manager, navigate to SAN > LUNs and create
c om
a LUN named
<name>SourceLUN Set the QoS properties to whatever you desire,
<name>SourceLUN.
c e s ethe LUN to
desire map
your Windows host, and enable Clones. rvi uid
se nt G
o -
r a cs tude
2. On your Windows host, right-click My Computer
@ p and i s S Manage. Click Storage >
select
Disk Management. o
fin se t h
r u
Note: If the initialize and Convert
l f er DisktoWizard
u starts, close it. If the LUN is not visible, run
the Rescan Disks utility.ue se
i g e n
o (m e lic
finassociated
a b l with <name>SourceLUN and initialize it. Perform a quick
3. Locate therdisku
rit andsname
f er it <name>SourceLUN.
formatFone
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
4 Locate the LabFiles folder on the desktop and open itit. Copy (do not move)
4.
testfile1.zzz to the <name>SourceLUN drive.
5. In the FS1 GUI, navigate to SAN > LUNs. Right-click <name>SourceLUN and select
Clone.
6. In the Create SAN Clone LUN dialog box, enter <name>CloneLUN1 in the LUN Name
field and leave the other settings at their default values. At this time, you will skip
Mapping. Click OK. Verify that the status shows Online.
7. On your Windows host, copy testfile2.zzz into <name>SourceLUN.

8. On the FS1, create a second Clone LUN of <name>SourceLUN and name it
<name>CloneLUN2.
9 On
9. O your Windows
Wi d h t copy testfile3.zzz
host, fil 3 i t <name>SourceLUN.
into S
10. On the FS1, create a third Clone LUN of <name>SourceLUN and name it
<name>CloneLUN3.
11 Now there are three clones each being a point

11. point-in-time
in time copy,
copy each having different
contents as follows:
<name>SourceLUN
testfile1.zzz
s a
testfile2.zzz ) ha
c om
test
testfile3.zzz
e3.
i c es ide
<name>CloneLUN1
- s erv t Gu
testfile1.zzz
c s o den
<name>CloneLUN2 p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
testfile1.zzz
r r u u s e
testfile2.zzzlfe to
e
gu cens e
<name>CloneLUN3 m i
( e li
f i n o
testfile1.zzz b l
u
rrtestfile2.zzz
f er a
F e s
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
testfile3.zzz
12. To restore from one of the clones, on your Windows host, open
<name>SourceLUN and delete all three testfiles#.zzz files.
13. On FS1, navigate to SAN > LUNs and double-click <name>SourceLUN to open the
Modify SAN LUN dialog box.
14. On the Mapping tab, click the Windows host and Remove the mapping.
15. Return to your Windows host and open Disk Management to verify that
<name>SourceLUN is no longer available.

In the following steps, you recover <name>SourceLUN as it was after the second
Clone LUN operation was performed. Thus, testfile1.zzz and testfile2.zzz
should be recovered.
1. Navigate to SAN > LUNs, right-click <name>CloneLUN2 and select Restore from
Clone. Click OK when the Restore from Clone LUN dialog box appears.
2. After the restoration is complete, re-establish the mapping of <name>SourceLUN

to your Windows host.
3. Open My Computer and verify that <name>SourceLUN is available again. If it is

not visible, perform a Rescan Disks.
s a
) ha
4. Open <name>SourceLUN to view the contents.
c om
i c es ide
5. Verify that testfile1.zzz and testfile2.zzz are-present. s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Congratulations! You have completed Practice s have any questions about
o@4-7.thIf iyou
f i n e
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
5
System Hardware s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Describe the FS1 component relationships
Describe the purpose of each System Component

Describe the relative rack placement of System Components
Explain the difference between the FS1 Base and
Performance models
Differentiate between the functions of the Performance and s a
Capacity Drive Enclosures within the system design ) ha
Describe how to add Drive Enclosures to the FS1esc
om
i c d e
Recognize the power requirements for the sFS1erv Gu i
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

References
Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Customer Service Guide

O l FS1-2
Oracle FS1 2 Fl
Flash
h St
Storage S
System
t IInstallation
t ll ti Guide
G id (R
(Racked)
k d)
Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Installation Guide (Not-Racked)
Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Expansion Guide
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Hardware Architecture
Pilots
I/O I/O
Controllers
Drive Enclosures
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eFlash nStorage System is a scalable storage system providing connectivity to a
u e t r a
- pool. A system consists of management units (Pilots), a set of data movers
Mig non
common storage
(Controllers), and a number of disk arrays (Drive Enclosures) that comprise the storage
pool.
The Pilots provide the interfaces and functionality required to manage and configure the
storage. They also monitor and provide event Alerts and messages to administrators and
service support organizations via email and Call-Home.
The Controllers provide both the necessary protocol support for the interface as well as
read/write caching, snapshot technology, backup and storage virtualization functions.
The Drive Enclosures provide the storage pool and interconnect to the Controllers via the
backend SAS fabric.

Oracle Rack
Rack Specs
42U
EIA-310D Compliant
Dimension
Height: 83 (2108.2mm)
Width: 24 (609.6mm)
Depth: 47.2 (1200mm)
700 1200 lbs.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eRack n built in rolling castors and cabinet levelers. A pair of PDUs are vertically
has
u e t r a
- rear of the cabinet on each side. Each PDU should be connected to a
Mig non
mounted in the
separate commercial power sources for redundancy. PDUs have remote monitoring capability
using an operator-accessible meter and function switch, or remotely through a network
connection.
Note: Position rack appropriately for proper air conditioning. Air flow is front to back.
CAUTION: Deploy the rack anti-tilt mechanism (red bars at left and right on front of rack)
before extending components via their sliding rails.
Refer to the Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Customer Service Guide for details.

FS1-2 in Oracle Racks
Expansion
Cabinet
Controllers
Pilots
MaxRep s a
) ha
c om
DE (2U)
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
DE (4U) c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The Controllers n Pilots are placed in the center of the rack and the DEs fill in from the
and
u e t r a
- grouped in strings in the factory (max 5 DEs per string). Up to two MaxRep
Mig non
bottom and are
Replication Engines can be installed immediately below the Pilots (RU20 17) unless this
space is required for DEs, then the MaxRep units may be located in rack space above the
Controllers or moved to another cabinet.

Component Placement
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
There are
e
many n
different combinations of Drive Enclosures and Drive Enclosure strings
u e t r a
- the number of DEs and DE types. This slide has two examples of DE
Mig non
depending on
placement and string relationships. Each color represents a string of DEs. In these examples
of factory-installed DEs, the strings are populated from the bottom up. As systems grow in
your environment, the DE positions and string layout will vary.

FS1
Pil t
Pilots
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot: Overview
Systems shipped on or after the R6.2 GA date will be equipped

with the X5-2 Pilots. The X4-2 and X5-2 Pilots function identically.
FS1 systems equipped with X4-2 Pilots will be supported, for the
life of the system, with X4-2 parts. There are no plans to replace
X4-2
X4 2 Pilots in the field with X5-2
X5 2 Pilots
Pilots.
Feature X4-2 Pilot (2-1U servers) Nashua X5-2 Pilot (2-1U servers)
CPU
2.5 GHz 4-core Intel Xeon E5-2609 v2, 80
2.4 GHz 8-core Intel Xeon E5-2630 v3, 85 W
s a
) ha
W
Memory 2-8 GB DDR3-1600 DIMM 2-8 GB DDR4-2133 DIMM
c om
HDD 1-300 GB 10k RPM SAS 1-600 GB 10k RPM SAS es e
i c i d
SAS HBA 8-Port 6 Gbps SAS-2 PCIe 8-port 12 Gbpss
- ervPCIet G
SAS-3
u
(Estes)
c s o den
ILOM R3.1.2.10.b r7770
ra Stu
R3.2.4.42
p r9937
OS Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 (2.6.39)

n is Linux 6.6 (3.8.13)
o@OraclethEnterprise
ru f i e
f e r t o us
l
ue ense
i g
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot Clustering
Active/Passive failover
Pilot is the name of the cluster and of each node.
Failover is automatic and can be issued via CLI.

X4-2 OS = Oracle Linux 2.6.39-400.109.5el6uek.x86_64 #1
SMP Tue Jul 23 16:40:27 PDT 2013 x86_64 GNU/Linux
X5-2 OS = Oracle Linux 3.8.13-68.1.2.e17uek.x86_64 #2
SMP Mon Mar 30 11:45:57 PDT 2015 x86_64 GNU/Linux a
s
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot: Front and Back Images of the X4-2
300GB B
Boott D
Drive
i iin HDD0 (HDD1
(HDD1-8
8 e/w
/ fillers)
fill )
Labels applied at
System integration
PMI to FS1
To Customer Management Network CAT 6e CAT 6e Controller-2 s a
) ha
c om
PLT
i c es ide
erv t Gu
2
Serial Link
- s
o den
CAT 6e PMI
rolled null modem
c s
p ra StuPLT
o@ this
1
To Customer Management Network

u f i n e PMI to FS1 CAT 6e
e r r CAT 6e
u s Controller-1
l f t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
err Tonsfer
Pilot Connections
From l F
u e - t r a Purpose Type
ig Net0
MPilot-1 non Pilot-2 Net0 10GigE Copper RJ45
g
Private Management Interface (PMI)
( )
Pilot-1 Net 1 Controller-1 Net 3 10GigE Copper RJ45
Pilot-1 Net 2 Pilot-2 Net Mgmt 10GigE Copper RJ45
Pilot-1 Net Pilot-2 Net 2 Heart Beat 10GigE Copper RJ45
Mgmt
Pilot-1 Net 3 Customers Customers Management Network 10GigE Copper RJ45
Ethernet
To Purpose Type
Pilot-2 Net0 Pilot-1 Net0 10GigE Copper RJ45
Pilot-2
Pilot 2 Net Pilot 1 Net 2
Pilot-1 Heart Beat 10GigE Copper RJ45
Mgmt
Ethernet
600GB Boot Drive in HDD0 (HDD1
(HDD1-8
8 e/w fillers)
Labels applied at
System integration
PMI to FS1
To Customer Management Network CAT 6e Controller-2 s a
) ha
CAT 6e
c om
i c es ide
Serial Link
CAT 6e
- s erv t Gu PMI
rolled null modem
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u CAT 6e
u s e PMI to FS1 CAT 6e
l f e t o Controller-1
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
err Tonsfer
Pilot Connections
From l F
u e - t r a Purpose Type
ig Net0
g
( )
Mgmt
Ethernet
From To Purpose Type

Pilot-2
Pil t 2 Net
N t Pil t 1 Net
Pilot-1 N t2 Heart Beat 10Gi E Copper
10GigE C RJ45
Mgmt
Ethernet
FS1-2 Pilot Racking and Cabling
It can be installed in a four post-rack cabinet that conforms to

ANSI/EIA 310-D-1992 or IEC 60927 standards.
Oracle Sun Rack II models 1242 and 1042.

Cables are managed in the Cable Management Arm (CMA).
The only card installed in a pilot is the internal SAS HBA.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1
C t ll
Controllers
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller: Overview
Modified Netra X3-2L 2U Server e/w 2x Intel Xeon E5-2620 6-

cores each, 24 threads per node CPU
CPU: 2 Intel E5-2620 6 cores each. 24 threads per node

Two models:
Base Model Performance Model
DEs supported 20* 30
DIMMs 32 GB (2 16GB) 192 GB (12 16 GB) a
s
NVDIMMs** 8 GB (2 4 GB) 16 GB (4 4 GB) ) ha
c om
ESMs**
ESMs 2 (Positions 0 &1) 4 (Positions 0-3)
i c es ide
SAS HBAs 1 (slot 3)* 3 (slots s rv Gu
e2,3,6)
c s o dent
-
*Base model can be ordered with either 1 or 2ra
SAS HBAs,tu 2 SAS HBAs are
required to support 20 DEs.
p
@ this S
**Unique to the FS1 Controller fino
r
Base Systems are not upgradabler e
u touPerformance
s Systems.
l f e t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controllers Fail Over Fail Back (FOFB)
Active/Active, Asymmetric failover

ILOM is used by each node for intra-Controller
communications and should not be disconnected (unless

directed to do so by the Oracle Support).
FS1 controller
t ll FO/FB iis managed dbby th
the OS
OS.
OS = Oracle Linux 3.0.16-200.29.3.el6uek-
axnp.debug.060000.056600 #1 SMP Fri Sep 6 22:34:14 PDT a
2013 x86_64 GNU/Linux has )
o m
e s c
e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller
SAS Port #s SAS HBA
SAN ((or NAS) HBA Slots
Sl t Sl t
Slots
Serial Link to To Pilot Future NAS

To inter-node opposite (PMI)
port on opposite connections
Controller To opposite
Controller
To Net Mgt port Controller (PMI)
s
FS1 Controller a
) ha
ESM 2 or filler ESM 3 or filler on opposite
Number Display
Controller
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
ESM 0 ESM 1 r r u u s eFiller only Front with filter removed
l f e t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
The Performance
t r a nmodel Controller will be equipped with four Energy Storage Modules (ESM
u - model Controller will be equipped with two Energy Storage Modules (ESM 0 &
Mig non
0-3). The Base
1). The FS1 Controller is configured with nonvolatile memory for caching write data that is
protected by the ESMs.
Three PCIe slots are allocated to the SAS HBAs; the other three are available for customer
connections via Fibre Channel (SAN) or Ethernet (NAS) HBAs. NAS connections can also be
made via Net0 and Net1 on the motherboard.

FS Controller: SAS HBA Configuration
Slot #4 Slot #5 Slot #6
Cont. 02


Contt. 01
FS1-2 Base model (shown above) comes with one SAS card and can be ordered with two SAS
s a
) ha
cards per node.

SAS HBA Card are ppopulated
p as follows (p
(port numbers are rightc om
FS1-2 Performance model comes fully populated with three SAS cards.
g to left):
)
1st SAS Card in PCIe slot #3 i c es ide
2nd SAS Card in PCIe slot #6
- s erv t Gu
3rd SAS Card in PCIe slot #2
c s o den

ra Stu
SAN HBAs (16Gb/s FC Dual Port HBA) [future NAS HBA]
1st HBA in PCIe slot #1 p
2nd HBA in PCIe slot #4
f i n o@ this
r r u
3rd HBA in PCIe slot #5
u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Controllers n always deployed as pairs.
are
u e t r a
- two network interface HBA options: a SAN for FC and a 10gigE optical NAS.
Mig There
non
are
0G
10 GigE
g coppe
copper ca
can be ddriven
e ddirectly
ect y from
o tthe
e base Ethernet
t e et po
ports
ts ((Net0
et0 & Net1).
et )
Controllers support both NAS (future) and SAN but not on the same port.

Non-Volatile DIMM + Energy Storage Module
DDR3 SDRAM
NVDIMM: Flash-backed RAM plus Flash
memory
ESM: Power supply to provide 2-3

minutes time to write FLASH
HDD FF - ESM
FS1-2
FS1 2 NVDIMM solution
l ti
components
FS1-2 version has unique mid- a
plane to connect ESMs to
) has
NVDIMMs via cable. o m
e s c
ESM in HDD Form Factor mounts
e r vic Guide
from the front of the Controller
s o -s ent
chassis to enhance serviceability. prac tud
@ i s S
o
fin se t h
r u
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
The Non-Volatile
t r a n (NVDIMM) used in the FS1 is used to provide high-speed write
DIMM
u
caching and -data loss protection in the event of a power failure. Writes are acknowledged
Mig non
when a copy of the data is stored in each controllers memory. The copy resides in the
NVDIMMs. An Energy Storage Module (ESM) plugs into the 2.5 drive slot and provides
enough energy to copy the content of the memory to Flash.
Important
When replacing an ESM, wait two minutes to allow the ESM to drain. Otherwise,
potential damage might occur if the ESM is not completely discharged. Do not remove
an ESM from the Controller until the blue Ready to Remove LED is lit.
Do not mix ESM
S and NVDIMM types. The ESM S type must match the NVDIMM type. For
example, an ESM labeled A (ESM-A) must be paired with an NVDIMM labeled A
(NVDIMM-A). The NVDIMM type is printed on a small label near the end of the NVDIMM
cable.
Make a note of the ESM slot where a failed ESM was located so that the replacement
can be placed in the same slot to avoid the risk of misconfiguration.

Mirrored Writes Using NVDIMMs
Write data is mirrored with nonvolatile copy in the buddy controller NVDIMM.
Host Data Paths Host Data Paths

HA Drivers HA Drivers
CU0 CU1
Cache
Cache
GDM Link
CU 1 CU 0
NV Cache NV Cache
SAS Drivers SAS Drivers

s a
) ha
- DE Data Paths - - DE Data Paths -
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
All DEs
c s o den
CU0 Normal Path
CU0 Failover Path p ra CU1 S tuNormal Path
o@ this
CU1 Failover Path
u f i n e
r r u s
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u fearer cached in CU0 DIMMS and mirrored using GDM link to CU1 NV-
err nred)
Writes ltoFCU0 (in s
ue Writes- a then committed to disks. Note that if the DE data path fails, CU0 will use
trare
i g
DIMMS. n
M no
the GDN link to CU1 to reach the DE and commit the writes.
Writes coming to CU1 (in green) are mirrored to CU0 using the GDM link and then committed
to disks.

FS1 Controller Cabling
Cables are managed in the Cable Management Arm (CMA).

All cables must be routed through the CMA to allow for maintenance
operation without damaging/removing cables.
Excess cable will be stowed on the side of the rack. So care needs
to be taken when removing/installing side panels.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1
Di
Drive
Enclosures
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Drive Enclosure (DE): Overview
Two enclosure (chassis) types are available for the FS1

System:
Oracle Storage Drive Enclosure DE2-24P, Performance

Enclosure
Oracle Storage
g Drive Enclosure DE2-24C,, Capacity
p y Enclosure
Oracle DEs are high-availability Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
devices. The main components are hot-swappable, including:
Hard Disk Drives and Solid State Drives a
Input /Output Modules (IOMs) that provide the I/O connectors
) has
to connect the DEs to the Controllers or other DEs com
Dual
D l lload-sharing
d h i P Power CControl
t lMModules
d l (PCM) c e s e
i rdv Gui
The FS1 uses these features to provide o s e
a-fault-tolerant
t
c s e n
environment with no single point of rfailure.
p a Stud
DE status is indicated with LEDs
f i n e hisenclosure, both front
o@on tthe
and back, and in the Oracle f e r ru FS uSystem
s Manager UI.
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Performance Enclosure
(2U Chassis e/w 2.5 form factor drives)
DE 2-24P
Chassis ID
LED Display
For FS1-2 available in four configurations:

SSD 7, 13 ea. 400 GB SAS Performance Flash drives
SSD 7,13,19 ea. 1.6TB SAS Capacity Flash drives a
) has
HDD 24 ea. 300 GB SAS 10K RPM Hard Drive o m
HDD 24 ea. 900 GB SAS 10K RPM Hard H dD
Drive
c
i ices de
s e rv Gui
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
@ thiins blocks of six.
SSD drives can be fieldoupgraded
n
r r ufi use
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Drive Enclosures, ndrive types, and drive capacities change on a regular basis. You should
u e t r a
- Oracle representative to verify what types are available at any given time.
Mig non
consult with your

Capacity Enclosure (4U Chassis with 3.5-Inch Form
factor Drives))
DE 2-24C
Chassis ID
LED Display
s a
For FS1-2 available in 1 configuration ) ha
c om
HDDs
HDD 24 ea. 4 TB SAS - 7200 RPM Hard H dD i ices de
Drive
s e rv Gui
HDDs 24 ea. 8 TB SAS - 7200 RPM Hard o- Drive n t (available
c s e
with R6.2 and later) p ra Stud
Drives in new DEs come pre-zeroed
f i n e this time to full
o@to speed
customer functionality. ferru o us
u e l se t
( m ig icen Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
o l e l
i n
uf ferab
r r
l Fe randrive
Drive Enclosures,
e
s types, and drive capacities change on a regular basis. You should
g
consult
i o -t Oracle representative to verify what types are available at any given time.
u withnyour
MHigh capacity
n requires 3.5 3.5 drives housed in a 4U enclosure.
Notes
Zeroing is only performed in the factory on new DEs, not individual drives.
Zeroing, or initialization, is a process of the Oracle FS System of writing zeros to all or
part of the storage capacity of the drives in the Drive Enclosures. This process is
required for DEs used in the Oracle FS System to make the storage capacity available
for allocation.

Enclosure: Back Sides
SAS connects
to ports on I/O
Modules.
IOM and Power I/O Modules DE2-24P
Cooling Module
are hot swap.
s a
PCMs ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
l f e t o DE2-24C
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
Each enclosure
t r a n redundant power and cooling (PCM) and dual SAS expander I/O
has
u -
Mig non
modules (IOM).
Cautionary note for cabling: In the 2U DE, the orientation of the IOMs is inverted. In 4U DE,
both of the IOMs are oriented the same way.

Drive Enclosure Rack Placement and Growth
DE #12
The FS1-2 can be configured
DE #11
using from 1 to 30 Drive
DE #10
Enclosures.
DE #09
Additional cabinets should be
DE #08
adjacent to each other with
DE Growth - Bottom to Top

interior side panels removed.
When cabling between racks,
SAS cables should be routed
DE #07
s a
horizontally across the cabinets
DE #06 ) ha
c omDE #05
from inside.
inside
i c es ide
-
DE erv t Gu
DE #04
s#03
c s o den
p ra DE S u
t#02
f i n o@ thisDE #01
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Drive Enclosures n
are installed starting at the bottom of the rack at rack unit 1, growing from
u e t r a
- In the factory, drive strings will be grouped together as they are installed in the
Mig non
bottom to top.
rack. If there is a mix of 2U and 4U Drive Enclosures within the same string, the 2U Drive
Enclosures will be installed below the 4U Drive Enclosures.
The FS1 system can be configured using from 1 to 30 Drive Enclosures. When additional
racks are required, if possible, the racks should be located adjacent to the rack with the
Controllers, with the side panels removed. When cabling between racks, SAS cables should
be routed horizontally across and inside the cabinets.

Drive Enclosure Strings and Cabling Basic guidelines
Each Controller can have from 1-3 SAS cards installed.

Base model can be ordered with 1 or 2 SAS cards per
Controller node, supporting a maximum of 20 DEs.

Performance model has three SAS cards per Controller node,
supporting
pp g a maximum of 30 DEs.
Each SAS card supports two strings of DEs (maximum of 5
DEs per string).
As DEs are added, the strings should be built out evenly. a
When multiple DE strings and DE types are specified in a ) h
as
system,
y , the DEs within the strings g shall include a mix c omthe
of
c s e
eI/O
different DE types in order to maintain the highest i
rv Guid
s e
performance.
c s o- dent
DEs in the same string should be p ra toSeach
close tu other if
possible. f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
Cable connections arelfemadetousingg miniSAS cables.
ue ense
i g
u f i n abl
F err ofnone
A stringl consists s fetor five Drive Enclosures. A system can have up to six strings,
g ue nupon
depending
i - trathe number of SAS HBAs installed.
MNotes no
DEs in strings should be balanced as per guidelines listed in the slide and, therefore,
DEs should not be grouped in strings by DE type or Drive type (for example, placing all
DE2-24C in one string separating DE2 types into separate strings).
See Appendix B for additional information on cabling DEs in strings.

One DE String
Each pair of SAS HBAs supports two DE strings of up to 5 DEs for a total of 10 DEs per SAS HBA pair.
SAS HBAs
FS1 Controller 01 FS1 Controller 02
Installed in PCIe
slot of each
SAS HBA PORTS SAS HBA PORTS
Controller
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
s a
) ha
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1
1st Drive Enclosure 2nd Drive Enclosure c om 3rd Drive Enclosure

i c es ide
st
1 DE in String
- s erv t Gu
(Head-of-String) 0 1 2
Ports
0 1 2
Ports
c s o den 0 1 2
Ports
0 1 2
Ports
IOM-0 IOM-1
p ra Stu IOM-0 IOM-1
4 Drive Enclosure o@
th5isDrive Enclosure
th th
f i n e
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
A pair of SAS
t
HBAs,
r a n one installed in Controller 01 and one installed in Controller 02, support
u -
Mig non
two Drive Enclosure strings, one string connected via Ports 0 (as shown here) and one string
connected via Ports 1. Each string can have up to 5 Drive Enclosures for a total of 10 Drive
Enclosures per SAS HBA pair.
The first head of string Drive Enclosure connects its:
IOM-0 Port 0 to Controller-01 SAS HBA Port 0
IOM-1 Port 0 to Controller-02 SAS HBA Port 0
I/O Module connections:
IOM Port 0 connects upstream to the Controller
Controller.
IOM Port 1 connects downstream to the 2nd and 3rd Drive Enclosure in the string.
IOM Port 2 connects downstream to the 4th and 5th Drive Enclosure in the string.

Two DE Strings
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
This diagram
e n an FS1-2 System with two strings of Drive Enclosures.
represents
u e - t r a
MInigthis diagram,
non the Drive Enclosure numbers are Chassis ID numbers. Drive Enclosure
Chassis ID numbers as indicated apply only to a system with one (1) SAS adapter per FS1
Controller node.
CAUTION: When DEs are added to a string, there is a requirement in some cases to
disconnect an existing cable and replug into an added DE. Refer to the product
documentation listed earlier in the lesson for details. The process needs to be carried out with
due care and rigor.

Six DE Strings
1 2
s a
3 4 ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
5 p6ra S tu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Drive
E l
Enclosure
Expansion
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Planning Steps for Adding Drive Enclosures
The version of software determines the method used for

adding DEs to the system.
Determine the current state of the system and gather the

following configuration details:
Verify
V if that
th t the
th system
t software
ft is
i up-to-date.
t d t
Gather the SAS topology map to verify the DE string topology.
Ensure that there are no topology rule violations.
a
Using chassis IDs of installed DEs and the SAS topology map,
) has
and verify the physical arrangement of the installed DEs
c om
and
strings.
strings ces e rvi Guid
Determine a time to install the new DEs. s e
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
Note: The
e
planning n process for system expansion is more efficient with systems that are
u e t r a
maintained in- a standard configuration.
Mig non
Oracle recommends that DE expansions should occur during a time when the system load is
low. However, the FS1 is designed so that DE expansions can be done during production
while the system remains online.

Additional Planning Steps for Adding Drive Enclosures
Use an Expansion Planning Worksheet to determine:

The DEs to be added
The rack locations for the new DEs

The connectivity and cabling requirements
If additional racks will be required
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Wherever F e
possible ncustomers should work in advance with their Sales Consultant to complete
u e t r a
- Expansion Planning Worksheet. The Oracle FS1-2 Storage System
Mig non
an Oracle FS1-2
Expansion Guide contains a sample of the Expansion Planning Worksheet.

Drive Enclosure Unpacking
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Included F
in
ethe n
packaging, in addition to the DE, will be SAS Cables, Power Cables, Rail Kit,
u e t r a
- Label kit.
Mig non
and an Expansion

Workflow for Installing New Drive Enclosures
Review SAS cabling requirements.

Validate the current state of the system.
Install new DEs in the rack as defined in the Planning

document.
Identify the string configuration.
Prepare the system for connecting DEs.
Use FSCLI topology command + GUI information. a
s
Complete the addition of DEs. ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Refer to F e
the Oracle nFS1-2 Flash Storage System Expansion Guide for step-by-step details.
u e t r a
The process -for adding DEs to an FS1 differs between R6.1.x and R6.2.x. R6.2 introduces
Mig non
GUI-based Guided Maintenance tool to assist you in adding new DEs.

Drive Enclosure Add Order: Performance Model
String
g numbers
s a
Head of ) ha
mControllers
String Load balance Drive Enclosures across strings.
s co
DEs ice uide
Install fastest Drive Enclosures closest to the Controllers.
r v
se t G
Alternate string connections and HBA slot -positions.
o den
c s
a Stu Key
p rString
Chassis ID numbers may vary.
o @
t h i s#s across top
u f i n e Green
Gray boxed #s are DE # within String
e r r u s boxed #s are DE add order
e f
l se t o
u
ig icen
o ( m l
i n l e
r r uf ferab
l Fe ofraaDrive
The position
e n s Enclosure within the SAS topology is determined by the string number
and
i g o n -t of the Drive Enclosure within the string. The location is determined by the
uthe location
M n
order in which a given Drive Enclosure was added to the string. The location defines the cable
connections for that Drive Enclosure.
Each Drive Enclosure has a chassis ID number displayed on the seven-segment LCD on the
front of each DE. The chassis ID number uniquely identifies each Drive Enclosure in an
Oracle FS System. Chassis ID numbers can be changed via the GUI if necessary to
accurately reflect the physical location of the DEs in the rack.
The slide above shows a logical diagram of a Performance model system with six strings
equipped
i d with
ith 30 DE
DEs.
A Base model system equipped with two SAS HBAs will alternate string connections between
the two HBAs similar to the above example.

Drive Enclosure Chassis IDs
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l IDtrnumber
The chassis n of the Drive Enclosure is based on the order by which the Controller
u e a
identifies the-Drive Enclosures. Drive Enclosures are also assigned a chassis ID number in
Mig non
the Oracle FS System Manager that is labeled Enclosure Chassis ID. The chassis ID
number can be changed using the Oracle FS System Manager. The chassis ID number
displayed on the chassis must always match the Enclosure Chassis ID displayed in the GUI.

Expansion Label Kit
Label Layout
Full text string
Quick reference.
Highlighting the part of the string a user most likely needs while
performing maintenance. (User unplugs only one end for system
access, then reconnects.)
Catering guide
s a
) ha
c om
Oracle FS-12
i c es ide
Flash Storage System
s e rv Gu
Storage Expansion
c s o dent
-
Label Kit
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F
A labell kit
err nsfwith
is included the shipment for expansion of the Oracle FS System. Use the
u e - t r a
Mig non
labels to designate the hardware component and the corresponding port to which the cable
connects and to identify the string assignment of an added Drive Enclosure.
Labels are included for attaching to the Controller end of cables, for the DE IOM end of the
cables, and for identifying the string.

Preparing the FS1 for Added DEs
Verify that the current versions of the GUI and CLI are
installed on your client workstation.
Connect power cables for DEs and power on the DEs.

Before making SAS connections, disable Call-Home to
preventt unnecessary Call-Home
C ll H events.
t
Connect SAS Cables adding each DE to the appropriate
string. a
Verify configuration using the CLI Topology command. ) has
Remember to enable Call-Home after all DEs havesbeen com
e e
added to the system. rvic uid se nt G
o -
r a cs tude
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F err nsfany er
Beforeldisconnecting
a cables, ensure that you are working with the correct Drive
u e t r
- the beaconing process, the system flashes the LEDs on the specified Drive
ig nonThe
Enclosure.
MEnclosure.
During
flashing LEDs help you locate the Drive Enclosure in the rack and determine
the cabling connection.
For examples of the CLI topology command, see the lesson titled Monitoring and
Maintenance and/or the Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Expansion Guide.

Guided Maintenance Add DE Tool (R6.2)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
After the F e
DEs are nracked, the Add Drive Enclosure action will walk you through the process of
u e t r a
- SAS cables between the new DE and other DEs or to the Controllers.
Mig non
connecting the

Add Drive Enclosure: Select the Drive Enclosure Type
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In this example, n select to add a Performance enclosure.
you
u e - t r a
Mig non

Add Drive Enclosure: Ready to Begin
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Add Drive Enclosure: Cable the New Drive Enclosure
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The Add F e
Drive n
Enclosure tool will walk you through connecting the SAS cables one at a time
u e t r a
- the connections are correctly made as you proceed. Follow the steps carefully.
Mig non
and verify that
After the connections are made, the new capacity will be added to the system. Connect one
DE at a time using this tool in order to successfully add new capacity to your system.

Adding SSDs to a Drive Enclosure
SSD Expansion Sequence:

1. Insert SSDs in the next available slots.
2. In the GUI, go to System Alerts and click the Foreign Disk

Drive alert.
3. Click Accept New Drives, then click OK.
The System updates the status of each new drive and

s a
automatically creates new Drive Groups. ) ha
c om
4 Assign the Drive Groups into the Storage Domains
4.
i c es where
i d e
extra storage is needed.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
If you areF e
using then FSCLI, issue:
u e t r a
ig non- list details
Msystem_alert
to view the alert for foreign drives,
drives the alert displays the DE identifier and the foreign drives
drives.
Issue:
fscli enclosure modify enclosure enclosure-id-or-fqn acceptDrive
drive-slot-number [, drive-slot-number]

Power
and
d
PDUs
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Single-Phase PDU
Two vertically mounted PDUs are supplied per rack, rated at

30A and can supply 10 KW.
Each PDU has 42 outlets arranged in 6 groups of 7 outlets (0-

5 in diagram).
Each C13 receptacle can supply 10 A.
Each group of 7 outlets have a 20 A rated circuit breaker that
can be reset.
Inlet style for N. America, S. America, Japan, and Taiwan is
NEMA L6-30. a
s
Inlet style for EMEA is IEC309.
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
IEC309 NEMA p ra Stu
L6-30
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e Single-phase PDU outlet groups
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
e42U n uses preinstalled vertical PDUs. PDUs are always installed in pairs.
rack
u e t r a
- be attached to a dedicated facility circuit. Each FS1 component must have its
Mig non
Each PDU must
power supplies connected to separate PDU circuits to ensure power redundancy.

Single-Phase PDU Cabling
Factory supplied cables are short with
Factory-supplied
a 90 C14 Left Angled Male connector.
AC Lines in
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Refer to F e
the n Guides for additional details on single-phase PDUs, and for
Installation
u e t r a
- three-phase PDUs.
Mig non
information on

Lesson Summary

Describe the FS1 component relationships
Describe the purpose of each System Component

Describe the relative rack placement of System Components
Explain the difference between the FS1 Base and
Performance models
Differentiate between the functions of the Performance and s a
Capacity Drive Enclosures within the System Design ) ha
Describe how to add Drive Enclosures to the FS1esc
om
i c d e
erv Gu
Recognize the power requirements for the sFS1 i
c s o- dent
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1. What components protect the FS1 from data loss in the event of a power failure?
2. What are the two options for Controllers?
3. What is the base operation system for the Pilots?

s a
) ha
c om
4. How many SAS HBAs are required to support 18 Drive Enclosures? i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
5. Describe the optional configurations for
f i n the
e this equipped with 1.6TB SSDs.
o@DE2-24P
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
6. How many DE strings o (mcanebelicsupported by the Performance model FS1?
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
M7.igThe nESM
on provides approximately how many minutes of power to the NVDIMMs?
8. If a MaxRep engine is mounted in the Oracle FS1 rack what rack unit positions will it
normally occupy?
9. How many AC lines are required to supply the single-phase vertical PDUs in an Oracle
FS1 rack?

10. What is the purpose of the Pilots in an FS1 configuration?
11. Ideally where in a string would you add a DE2-24P equipped with SSDs?
12. What is the proper cable routing when cabling between two racks for the FS1-2
system?
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
6
Monitoring and
Maintenance s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Monitor multiple FS Systems from MaxMan
Gather system statistics and performance and trending

information
Monitor system status and handle alerts
Configure notifications
Create, download, and view reports a
Collect system information and generate log bundles m) has
Describe how to use Guided Maintenance s co
r v ice uide
Describe how to perform system updates -se tG
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

References

Oracle MaxMan Users Guide
Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Customer Service Guide
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Monitoring Tools
Tool Category Tools

Oracle MaxMan Status Overview

(monitor multiple FS1-2 and/or Axioms) Recent Alerts
Software Modules
Configuring Notifications Email Alerts
Call-Home
SNMP SNMP Traps
(update MIB after code change) a
s
Performance LUNs
) ha
SAN Protocol
c om
Collect Debug Logs ice
s e
Collect System Information
(and download files from the Pilot) Collect Events s e rv Guid
Logs
Collectc s o- dent
Statistics
@ pra DE,
Collect S tu and Pilot Logs
Controller,
f i n o
e this
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

MaxMan
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Oracle MaxMan: Overview
MaxMan enables you to monitor multiple Oracle systems

including Oracle FS Systems and Oracle Axiom Systems from a
single client interface.

Create, save, and manage lists of systems to monitor.
Monitor
M it Status,
St t Recent
R t Alerts,
Al t Recent
R t Events,
E t and d Storage
St
Usage.
View the installed Software Modules. a
Download MaxMan from the FS1-2 System Pilot via the FS ) has
Portal. c om
MaxMan runs in a browser. i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
MaxMan is supported on Mac, Windows, c s oOracle
d e nLinux, and
Oracle Solaris. pra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You may l F e
want n lists of systems based on geography and organization, or all systems
toacreate
u e t r
ig which
for
Mstart n- are responsible. If you see an issue with a system in MaxMan, you can directly
you
noOracle
the FS System Manager (or Axiom Storage System Manager) on that system to
resolve the issue.

Downloading Oracle MaxMan
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You canl F e
access n download MaxMan from the FS system Pilot on the FS Web Portal. You
and
u e - t r a
ig not nneed
do
Mnormally ncredentials
othrough to access the FS Web Portal. However, you need access to the Pilot,
the public IP address. MaxMan is available as an .msi, a .zip, or a .tar
file.
Oracle MaxMan is available for download only from an FS1-2 system. It is not available on the
Axiom systems but will allow you to monitor Axiom systems.

MaxMan Installation (Windows .msi)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Start the
l F e n by using the automatic installation file format (.msi) for Windows, or by
installation
u e t r a
extracting the- archived files (.zip or .tar). MaxMan runs on Windows, Mac, or as a shell
Mig non
file.

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You canl F e
start MaxMann in one of the following ways:
u e - t r a
Mig Fornon
Windows,
o de where
folder
double-click the shortcut on your desktop (shown in the slide) or in the
e e itt is
s installed.
sta ed
For Linux or Solaris, navigate to the directory where it is installed and run the
runOracleMaxMan.sh shell script.
For MacOS, navigate to the folder where it is installed and access a Max command line
to run the runOracleMaxMan.command script.

Starting MaxMan
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
No p fe needed
password
e l e to to start MaxMan
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
After youF e
start n the program runs continuously until you close the browser; there is
MaxMan,
u e t r a
- for inactivity. Initially, no systems are presented. You will create lists and
Mig non
no timeout period
add groups of systems to be monitored in each list.
The display automatically refreshes every five minutes. You can also refresh the data by
using the Refresh menu.

Navigating MaxMan
Main Menu
N
New: Closes
Cl the
th currentt lilistt tto
manage or open a new list
Open: Opens an existing list
Save: Saves changes to the current

list
Save As: Saves changes to the
current list under a new name
Delete: Removes the current list
Manage List: Adds, modifies, or
creates a list
Refresh: Updates the data displayed
Help: Opens the Oracle MaxMan
s a
Left Navigation Users Guide
) ha
Summary: Displays a summary page for all systems in the current list
c om
Oracle Axiom Systems: Displays the Axiom Systems in the current list
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Oracle FS Systems: Displays the FS1-2 Systems in the current list
- s
System Alerts: Displays all alerts for all systems in the current list
o den
s
Recent Events: Displays recent events for all systems in the current list
c
p ra Stu
Software Modules: Displays the installed software versions for all systems in the
current list
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
From the F e
main n you can create, manage, and delete lists of systems. The main menu
menu,
u e t r a
- to these functions.
Mig non
provides access

Summary Page
Sortable
column data
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The Summary pagen displays a status overview, recent alerts and event notification, and
u e t r a
- for all of the monitored systems. This is the landing page when you open
Mig non
physical capacity
MaxMan. Data columns are sortable and additional information can be displayed by using the
Expand or Collapse controls.

Oracle Axiom Systems Page
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eAxiom nSystems page displays information for all the monitored Axiom systems.
u e t r a
MSystem on-
ig ncomponent name equivalents:
FS System Axiom System
Pilots Pilot
Controllers Slammers
Drive Enclosures Bricks

Oracle FS Systems Page
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Oracle
eFS n page displays information for all the monitored FS systems.
Systems
u e - t r a
Mig non

System Alerts Page
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l Alerts
The System npage displays alerts for each FS1-2 or Axiom system monitored by
u e
MaxMan. - t r a
Mig non
Too manage
a age a any
y monitored
o to ed syste
system,, right-click
g t c c tthe
e syste
system and
a d select
se ect Manage
a age Sto
Storage
age
System. The system login screen is displayed if the appropriate GUI version is available. If
the GUI version is not available, a Download GUI Version is displayed. Select Yes to
download the required GUI version.
Log in to the system by using the appropriate credentials.
MaxMan will continue to run while you are logged in to an FS1-2 or Axiom system.

Recent Events Page
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Recent
eEvents n page displays events for each FS1-2 or Axiom system monitored by
u e
MaxMan. - t r a
Mig non

Software Modules Page
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The Software
e n page displays the software and firmware installed for each component
Modules
u e t r a
of the FS1-2 -or Axiom system monitored by MaxMan.
Mig non

Where to Start: Create a List
A list of monitored Oracle systems saves you time by enabling you to

remotely monitor multiple systems at the same time rather than having to
log in to each system one at a time. To create a list:

1. Click Manage List.
2. Complete the fields for Preferred Credentials. These will be your default
credentials.
credentials
3. Click Add to enter a system (either by IP address or FQDN).
4. Click Add again for each additional system you want in your list.
If you want to use different credentials on any system, deselect Use Preferred
s a
) ha
and enter the credentials that you want used instead.
m
5. Click OK and you will be logged in to the systems. Their status willobe
c
displayed.
displayed es
During the login process, you may
e r vic Guide
be asked to download new GUI
s o -s ent
versions.
r a c tud
6. If you want to save this list for future use,@ pclick iSave
s S As and enter a name
and password for your list.
o
fin se t h
r u
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
Notes l F
err nsfer
i g e plan
u If youn - trato use MaxMan for multiple systems, you may want to use or create an
M no
accou t o
account on eac
each syste
system witht tthee sa
samee ID aand
d pass
password.
o d Enter
te tthat
at ID a
and
d pass
password
o d in
the Preferred Credentials field. You need to set up those accounts before creating the
list.
When MaxMan is logging in, you may be asked if you want version software
downloaded; answering yes will enable viewing. You can view systems that are on
different versions of Axiom R5.x or FS1-2 R6.x.
If any of the systems in the list does not have an account that matches the credentials
provided,
id d you receive
i a ffailed
il d tto access error message.
If any of the systems does not respond, MaxMan may time out and you will receive a
failed to access or access error message.

Managing Lists
You can add
add, modify,
modify or remove systems from your lists.
lists
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
You create F ea listaofnmanaged systems by adding one or more Oracle systems that you want to
g u
monitor
e and - tr
manage. To reuse this list, save it. Lists are stored locally in a database on the
M i no n
client computer from which the application is launched. Usernames and passwords in the lists
are encrypted. When you save a list, you will be prompted for a list name and password.
Passwords must meet standard security requirements, such as a minimum of eight
characters, at least one uppercase letter, one lowercase letter, and one digit.

Opening an Existing List
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
Select the list of systems that you - s erv t Gu
want to view by using the List c s o den
Name drop-down list, and enter p ra Stu
the List password.
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Use Open F e
to open nan existing list. You will need to select the list that you want to monitor and
u e - t r a
Mig non
enter the password for the list. Only one list can be opened at a time.

Managing a Monitored System
When there is an issue
issue, such as an Alert
Alert, with a system that you are monitoring
monitoring, you can launch
the Oracle FS System Manager GUI or the Oracle Axiom System Manager GUI from
MaxMan. Right-click the system that you want to manage and select Manage Storage System
to open a login panel.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Statistics
and
Trending
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Statistics and Trending: Overview
Statistical data is collected to help compare your objectives

with actual storage performance. Statistical data can also be
used to help troubleshoot performance issues.

Statistical data enables the following:
M
Monitoring
it i system
t performance
f
Reviewing data by port, storage object, protocol, and Controller
Analyzing performance data to improve metrics
s a
Performance data is available for:
) ha
Drive Groups c om
CPUs i c es ide
LUNs - s erv t Gu
c s o den
Controller Protocols p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Storage Performance Statistical Data Terminology
The following terms are used to describe performance on the

FS1-2:
I/Os per second is the number of input and output operations

per second, or IOPS, usually shown as read, write and total.
Latency
L t i th
is the ti
time it ttakes
k for
f a readd or write
it operation
ti to
t
complete.
Queue Depth is the number of I/O requests waiting to be a
completed.
) has
Response Time is the average time to complete anI/O c om
operation. i c es ide
s e rv Gu
Throughput is the amount of data per ssecond
c
-
o dethat nt is
ra Stu represents
processed by the FS1-2 system. Throughput
p
@ this
bandwidth. finor u s e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
Notes l F
err nsfer
i g ue n-that
Factors
tracontribute to Latency include the amount of time to read data from or write
M data noto a disk (so latency will be higher on HDDs and lower on SSDs), and the amount of
time required to transfer data over a storage link.
Response Time is measured in milliseconds.
Throughput is measured in megabytes per second or as IOPS.

LUN Statistics and Trending
LUN statistics are displayed in the main table, which is updated every
two minutes.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In the example in nthe slide, LUN statistics are displayed in a table, which is updated every two
u e t r a
- statistics are available on a per LUN basis in a Detailed view and every
Mig non
minutes. These
second on the Real Time graph.

Controller Protocol Statistics and Trending
Controller statistics provide an overview of the Controller ports.

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In the example in nthe slide, statistics are arranged by Controller name in the SAN Controller
u e - t r a
Mig non
Statistics table.

Drive Group Statistics
Access Drive Group Statistics for real-time statistics that can be used to review
performance.
f
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
When reviewing n Group statistics, consider the following:
Drive
u e - t r a
Mig The

non
statistics include all drives contained in the Drive Group.
The media type affects latency.
latency For example,
example latency is higher for HDD and lower for
SSD.

CPU Statistics
These statistics are used to identify system behaviors or variances in
performance.
f
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
StatisticsF e
are n for the selected Controller, which include percent time in kernel and
available
u e t r a
total percent -time busy.
Mig non

Storage Domain Reports
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
Select la F
err nsfer and right-click to display the actions menu. At the bottom of the
StorageaDomain
g
menu,
i ue theren-are
tr three choices for displaying analysis on the domain storage:
M no
Ge e ate Auto-Tier
Generate uto e Effectiveness
ect e ess Report
epo t
View Auto-Tier Graphs
View Storage Allocation Details

Storage Domain Effectiveness Report
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
To createF e
and view na report immediately, click Generate and View Report.
u e - t r a
ig create
MTo noanreport and view it at a later time, click OK. To view the created report later,
navigate to System > Reports & Statistics > Generated Reports.

Storage Domain: Auto-Tier Graphs
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Auto-Tier F e
Graphs ndisplays graphically the effectiveness of the QoS Plus feature for a
u e t r a
collection of -auto-tiered LUNs in the selected Storage Domain. It displays two graphs:
Mig non
ata Transferred
Data a s e ed Byy Number
u be of
o Accesses
ccesses
Tier Structure By Storage Class and Priority

Storage Domain: Storage Allocation Details
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Storagel F e
Allocation nDetails displays, by Storage Class, the storage capacities for all of the
u e t r a
- and auto-tier LUNs in the selected Domain. Place the cursor over each
Mig non
single-tier LUNs
section of the graph to see what each category displayed represents. It displays:
Single Tier
Auto Tier
Immobile
Free
Unused
Unavailable

System
Alerts
and
Events
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Managing System Alerts
Some configuration events in an FS1-2 system require

administrator intervention to resolve the underlying issue. The
system notifies you of a System Alert by displaying a flashing

exclamation point icon ( ) on the GUI status bar. When this icon
is displayed
displayed, the GMT time of the most recent Alert is displayed to
the right of the icon. Clicking the icon will open the System Alerts
page, which shows the following information:
The cause of the alert a
) has
The time that it occurred om
c
The
Th name off theth affected
ff t d componentt i c es ide
A description of the problem - s erv t Gu
c s o den
pra Stu action.
To resolve the issue, perform the recommended
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

System Alerts
s a
) ha
c om
Flashing icon with GMT date of the
i c es ide
erv t Gu
most recent alert
- s
o den
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
If the system has n you can view the details and perform any required action.
alerts,
u e t r a
- alert and select Manage (or double-click the alert) to display more details,
Mig non
Right-click each
including possible actions required. After an alert is resolved, the system deletes the alert
from the list. Information about the alert will still be shown in the Events list and in log files on
the Pilot.

Viewing Details on Alerts
Clicking the Alert will

display the details.
s a
) ha
Clicking this icon will
c om
open the System
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Alerts page.
- s
o den
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
When youF e
click thenSystem Alerts icon, the System Alerts page is displayed.
u e t r a
-Alerts page shows any problems currently being experienced by the FS1-2.
ig System
MThe non
oub e c c g a
Double-clicking an a
alert
etd displays
sp ays a window
do co
containing
ta g tthe
e sa
same
e information
o at o tthat
at is
sddisplayed
sp ayed
on the System Alerts page. However, the window contains a button with which you can copy
the information to the clipboard.

Alert Messages at Login
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Alert Panels Displayed at Login: Examples
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

System Events
Events can be viewed in the event log.
Email Alerts SNMP Alerts
s a
) ha
c om
S
Sym. S
Severityit S
Sym.
i c es ide
Critical Access to data may be compromised.
- s erv t Gu
Warning c
Administrator action is required to s o e nerror from becoming
prevent adsoft
an error or critical event. pr
a Stu
n o@ is or another non-error event
thdetected
Informational
has occurred. ru f i
A configuration change has been
e
l f er to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
Administrators
t rcan
a ndisplay system events and performance statistics for logical volumes
u
(LUNs), and -SAN protocols.
Mig non
Syste Events,
System e ts, along
a o g with
t eerror
o messages,
essages, are
a e the
t e main
a form
o of
o communication
co u cat o bet
between
ee
the system and the customer about the health of the system and its current status. System
Events are stored in an event log.
The FS1-2 system generates events and classifies them by severity, as shown in the table in
the slide.
The event log is accessed by clicking Alerts and Events > Event Log in the navigation pane
on the System tab.

Event Log Page
Use the Event Log page to review entries in the FS1-2 event log. The field definitions are:
Event: Type of entries in the event log
Severity: Level of severity of the event
- Critical
- Warning
- Informational
Category
- Audit
- Security
- System
Time Occurred: Time at which the event occurred
Affected Item: Piece of FS1-2 hardware affected s a
User: Account Name ) ha
Description:
p Description
p of the event that occurred c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Viewing Events
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
To display
e
the n of an event, select the Actions drop-down menu or right-click the event
details
u e t r a
- Properties.
Mig non
and select Event

Filtering Events (1 of 2)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Event logF e
entries n be filtered by selecting Set Event Log Filter from the Actions
can
u e t r a
- in the Event Log window. Only events that match specific categories and
Mig non
drop-down menu
severities and/or falling within a specified date/time range can be displayed.
In the slide, a filter is being configured to suppress the display of Informational and Critical
events.

Filtering Events (2 of 2)
No Informational
messages are shown.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
After the F e
criteria ofnevents to filter are specified, the Event Log window is updated to display
u e t r a
- that match. Depending on the size of the event log, there may be a delay in
Mig non
only the events
displaying the set of filtered events.
In the slide, no messages with a severity of Informational are displayed.

Creating Event Notifications
RedAlert
me@somewhere.com
myboss@somewhere.com
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
An event F e n is processed when a specified event occurs and is of a specified
notification
u e - t r a
Mig non
severity. Occurrence of the event results in one or more configured recipients receiving an
email. Multiple event notifications, each specifying a particular set of events and severities,
can be created.
Event Severities
Critical: Access to data is compromised or data loss has occurred.
Warning: Administrator action is required to prevent a soft error from becoming a
Critical event.
Informational: A configuration change has been detected or a non-error event has
occurred.
Event Categories
Audit
System
Security
Note: Clicking Test Email sends a message [Test
[Test Email Notification] Event: Test email
email to
the recipients.

Reports
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Reports: Overview
Reports provide listings of configuration details, storage

performance, and statistical information about your system.
Reports are downloadable. You can generate a report

immediately or they can be scheduled. Generate the following
types of reports:
SAN Hosts
Storage Performance
a
Storage Use
) has
Storage Use per Volume o m
e s c
System Configuration
e r vic Guide
System Configuration Summary s o -s ent
c d ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Generating a Report
Select Generate
to create an
unscheduled
report at any time.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o denSelect a report
p ra Stu type to be
@ i s
u f i no e th generated.
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
You can
e l generate
t r a npredefined reports. For example, you can use reports to manage system
u - upgrades by generating a Performance Report and then a Storage Report.
Mig non
storage capacity
When a report is complete, the Generate Reports page displays the name of the report, the
time the report was created, and the size of the report.
Recommended Reports
Configuration Report at Install
Accounting Report for chargeback

Downloading a Report Column data Sortable
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
v Guin
Reports can berdownloaded
e formats.
- s
o dent
several
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F erris generated,
After alreport n s f you can view the report by downloading to your local host from the
u e - t r a
Mig non
Generated Reports folder in the navigation pane. It can be downloaded in CSV, Excel, HTML,
PDF, or XML format. Reports cannot be viewed directly from the Oracle FS System Manager.
Click the Browse button and choose a desired destination for the report, enter a File Name,
and click Save. Then click OK.
You must have the appropriate application to view the downloaded reports.

Viewing a Report
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The slideF e
shows n example of an Auto-Tier Effectiveness report downloaded in PDF format.
an
u e - t r a
Mig non

Creating Report Schedules
Specify the type of

report.
s a
Reports can be ) ha
c om created as often as
i c es ide every hour or as
- s erv t Gu infrequently as every
c s o den four weeks.
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
You canl F e
use Report n Schedules to generate different types of reports, at specific times and
u e t r a
frequencies. -The frequency of the report can be as often as every hour or as infrequently as
Mig non
every four weeks.

System
S t
Logs
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Oracle FS System Diagnostics
Oracle Customer Support might ask you to run one or more tools
and send the output to Oracle. The FS1-2 System is fault tolerant,
detects anomalies, and fails over to partner components to

maintain data availability. If a component fails, requiring
diagnostics to isolate and fix the issue, you may need to perform
any off the
th following:
f ll i
Collect system information (logs) and download a log bundle
to Call-Home. a
Diagnose Controller hardware and software. ) has
Run Controller commands. c om
i c es ide
Access the Drive Enclosure Console to diagnose
- s erv tDrive
G u
Groups. c s o den
Shut down and restart the FS1-2 p ra Stu
System.
f i n o@ this
Set halt points that pause use startup process.
rruthe system
fe e to
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Collecting System Information: Logs (1 of 2)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l Customer
Oracle n Support may request that you run one or more of the support tools and
u e t r a
- diagnostic output to them. Details can be collected about the FS1-2s
Mig operational
send n
the
no history at any time.
Several system information log files are available from the GUI:
- Debug logs to provide information about hardware component failures
- Event logs to capture critical, error, warning, and informational events
- Performance statistics to provide information about logical volumes and
protocols
y
- System inventory y to list serial numbers for the FS1 and its hardware components
p
- System configuration logs to report hardware, software, and firmware versions
To collect log files, navigate to Support > System Logs and select Create Log Bundle
from the Actions drop-down menu. You can also right-click in the right pane and select
Create.
Note: Oracle Customer Support will recommend the tool to use to collect system
information.

Breakdown of log file name:
AK00126934-140527191236-140527201412-PCP_EVT_SYSTEM_STATE_CHANGE-e-02-
02.tar
Name Description
AK00126934 System Serial Number
140527191236 Date of previous log (in two-digit format:

140527191236 = Mayy 27, 2014 19:12:36))
140527201412 Date of current log
PCP_EVT_SYSTEM_STATE_CHANGE Type
s a
) ha
e P = Primary
c om
M = Manual
i c es ide
erv t Gu
E = Event
D = Test - s
o den
c s
02 p ralog position
Current S tu
f i n o@ this
02 r r u u s eLogs (2 or 2)
Total
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Collecting System Information (2 of 2)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In the Create Log nBundle dialog box, you can specify the type of system information to
u e t r a
collect, such-as hardware component information, Event Logs, Client Logs, and Statistics,
Mig non
which provide a collection of performance, capacity usage, and system health information.
Unless told otherwise by Oracle Customer Support, leave all item types selected.
Oracle recommends log collection before and after updates, hardware changes, or other
activities.
Notes
FSPM data is included in Client Logs.
Client Logs can be generated for up to 10 hosts
hosts.
Replication Appliances are MaxRep Logs (all associated engines).
All Logs Since Last Log Collection provides logs for up to four months back.
Performance data is included in Statistics logs.

Sending an Existing Bundle
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
To download a log nbundle TAR file to your local host, select the appropriate log entry in the
u e t r a
- right-click, and select Send to from the menu. You can also do this from the
Mig non
content pane,
Actions drop-down menu.
Instead of downloading the log bundle to the local host, you can use the appropriate selection
from the same menu to send the log bundle to the Call-Home Server.
After the log collection completes, Customer Support may request you to do any of the
following:
Send the bundle to Oracles Call-Home server.
Upload the bundle to an FTP site.
Upload the bundle to Oracles Customer Support Portal.
Delete and Clear Logs options are accessible via the Support account.

System
St t
Status
and
Guided
M i t
Maintenance
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Guided Maintenance: Overview
Guided Maintenance (GM) provides a step-by-step graphical

interactive method for hardware replacement. GM via the GUI is
the preferred method of hardware replacement.

GM presents you with a sequence of dialog boxes that guide you
through the process of replacing Customer Replaceable Units
(CRUs). Oracle Support and a Field Engineer may be required
when replacing FRUs.
Each CRU has its own diagnostics and, therefore, its own uniqueas a
GM sequence. m )h
s co
B f
Before initiating
i iti ti GMGM, you should
h ld disable
di bl CCall-Home
ll H f e the
icfor th de
duration of the replacement. s e r v G ui
c s o- dent
p ra S
After a replacement CRU has been installed and
tu the system
s
no@ thi
returns to Normal, re-enable Call-Home.
ufi use
r r
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
To maintain n on or restore reliability to an FS1-2 System, hardware components
reliability
u e t r a
M(GM) on-needrequired.
ig isnnormally
occasionally to be replaced. To replace hardware components, Guided Maintenance
Guided Maintenance (GM) is a wizard that assists you in
determining the precise CRU that is faulty and walks you through the replacement process.
Guided Maintenance is initiated in the Oracle FS System Manager from the window in which
the CRU being replaced can be viewed. Replacement of CRUs can be performed by any
Administrator* account. (FRUs needing replacement require a Service Request.) When a
CRU requires replacement, use Guided Maintenance unless you are directed to do otherwise
by Oracle Support.
Notes
The FS1-2 Storage System ensures continuous data access during single point failures.
A second failure, such as operator error, may cause a more serious failure condition.
Therefore, use extreme care and take full advantage of the Guided Maintenance
features.
To repair the Pilot, you must use at least an Administrator 1 account.

Status of System: Dashboard
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
An indication of a an failed component is displayed in several areas in the Oracle FS System
u e - t r
Mig non
Manager GUI:
A warning
a g message
essage may ay appea
appear at login
og e enabling
ab g you to navigate
a gate to a spec
specific
c page with
t
information related to the status (see System Alerts).
Under Alerts and Events, the Status Summary and System Alerts pages provide status
information.
A summary of the system health is provided on the Dashboard page (shown in the
slide).
The Status bar provides indicator icons in the lower-left region of the GUI.

System Status Icon
Clicking this icon will open the

Status Summary page.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
Clicking this icon will open the
s e rv Gu
Status Summary page.
c s o dent
-
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l clicktrathenSystem Status icon, the Status Summary page is displayed.
When you
u e -
ig Overall
MThe non System Status icon (lower-left icon in the GUI) shows the overall status of the
FS1-2
FS1 2. If there are no faults,
faults the icon is a green dot indicating a Normal status.
status If the system
encounters a fault condition, depending on the type of fault, either an amber __(Warning) or a
red (Critical) icon is displayed.
In the slide, the yellow triangle means that an error condition cannot be corrected, but data is
still accessible, and user intervention is required. Clicking the icon displays the Status
Summary page. In the slide, Drive Enclosure 01 has a problem and has a status of Warning.

Status of System: Hardware Status Icon
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
Clicking this icon will
display the - s erv t Gu
Hardware summary c s o den
window.
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
When you F eclick thenHardware Status icon, the Hardware Overview page is displayed.
u e - t r a
ig error
MThe non
condition in one of the Drive Enclosures (shown in this slide) is also seen by clicking
t e Hardware
the a d a e Status icon
co (a
(also
so in tthe
e lower
o e left
e t region
eg o oof tthe
e GU
GUI).
) The
e resulting
esu t g Hardware
ad ae
status overview page (shown in the slide) shows components with a status of Warning.

Status of System: Hardware Menu
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
Navigating
eto the n Enclosures page (in this example) allows you to drill down into the
Drive
u e t r a
specific Drive- Enclosure to determine what CRU or FRU is causing the error condition; in this
Mig non
case, Drive 0 has failed.

Entering Guided Maintenance
Drive 0 has failed in

Enclosure 01.
Drive 0 has failed in

Enclosure 01.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In the Hardware n on the System tab, click Controllers or Drive Enclosures. In the
section
u e t r a
context pane,- select the appropriate component and right-click to view the actions menu.
Mig non
Select View Details from the menu. A window opens showing the Replaceable Units of the
Controller or Drive Enclosure. In this slide, details of the faulty Drive Enclosure are displayed.
To initiate Guided Maintenance, select the CRU needing replacement and click the Replace
Component button. The GM Wizard will start and walk you through the replacement process.
Note: Guided Maintenance for the Pilots is available but will follow a different sequence for
CRU replacements.

Guided Maintenance Step 1: Introduction
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The first F e
page ofaGMn is an introduction showing the component with the faulted CRU
u e - t r
Mig non
highlighted. Follow any instructions provided on each panel as you proceed through GM.

Step 2: Identify Hardware
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
GM canl F e
blink n on the target CRU (except those on power supplies) to identify the
allaLEDs
u e - t r
Mig non
CRU, while simultaneously turning off the LEDs on the front and back of all other
components. When selecting Reverse Identify, GM turns off the LEDs on the target CRU and
blinks the LEDs on all other components. Reverse identification is useful if the LEDs on the
target CRU are not working.

Step 3: Identify Hardware
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Clickingl F e
Next at a n 2 will start the LEDs blinking. In Step 3, you examine the system and
Step
u e - t r
Mig non
identify the blinking LEDs. Now that you have identified the precise location of the faulted
CRU, the system needs to be prepared for hardware replacement.

Step 4: Replace Hardware
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
BeforelGM
eprompts n you to replace a CRU, the FS1-2 performs some preparatory steps. The
u e t r a
- procedure explains these steps. For some CRUs, you will be prompted for
Mig non
CRU replacement
additional information. If you are prompted, enter the requested information.
If the preparation was successful, you are asked to manually remove the faulty CRU and
insert the replacement.
Notes
During GM, it is recommended that you complete all steps before viewing any System
Alerts that appear during the process.
p
In some replacement p
procedures,, the system
y issues a series of commands to
components to take them out of service so they can be replaced. When GM instructs
you to remove the CRU, do so even if you are only testing fault injection and recovery.
Otherwise, automatic recovery may be inhibited and data loss may result. Also, you
should not exit GM prematurely; doing so may leave a component out of service, which
may impact redundancy and recovery in the event of another fault.

Step 5: Verify Replacement Successful
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
In all cases
eof CRU n replacement, GM displays the Verify page after the CRU has been
u e t r a
- Verify page contains either a Next or a Finish button. Which button is available
Mig non
replaced. The
depends on whether the newly inserted CRU has been previously used in the FS1-2. If it is
not recognized, it is considered a foreign CRU. When clicked, the Next button displays a
window where you can accept the CRU. If the component being replaced is a disk drive, any
existing data on the new drive will be erased.
If there are no problems and no additional steps associated with the new CRU, the FS1-2 will
accept it into the system and present a Normal status (green) at step 5. This may take a few
seconds while the system diagnoses the replacement part. When all is well, GM reports a
Normal status for the CRU. Click Finish to complete GM and exit the wizard.

Verifying the Status of the Replaced Drive
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
When replacing an CRU, the FS1-2 may perform additional steps before using the CRU in the
u e t r a
- in the example in the slide. After the GM is complete, and the new drive is
Mig non
system as shown
accepted into the system, additional steps will be performed (for example, Recovered,
Copyback, and so on) before finalizing the setup of the new CRU.

Health Status
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Drive Enclosure n status can be viewed by navigating to the System tab and selecting
health
u e t r a
- under Hardware. Green indicates normal. A yellow or red icon would
Mig non
Drive Enclosures
indicate a warning or critical status for all or part of a Drive Enclosure. Also, if there were any
fault conditions on any of the Drive Enclosures, the System Status icon and the Hardware
Status symbol would appear yellow or red.

Software
Updates
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Software Update Process
Types of releases are:

Major (for example, R6 to R7)
Minor (for example, R6.1 to R6.2)

Patch (for example, R6.1.1 to R6.1.2)
Types of updates that may involve an Oracle Services
Engineer:
Major releases (usually disruptive)
s a
Any disruptive upgrade
) ha
Drive Firmware upgrades c om
Controller BIOS upgrades i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
Minor and Patch releases are normally snondisruptive o den and, in
most cases, are customer installable.
c
ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Software Update Process
During Minor and Patch release updates, perform the

following:
Verify the currently installed release.

Make sure that there are no alerts and that the FS1-2 status is
Normal
Normal.
Check to make sure that all LUNs (and file systems) are online.
For a Major release update, it is recommended that a Service
a
has
Request (SR) be opened. (This may be required, in addition to
)
the above.) om
O
Opening
i an SR gets t the
th Oracle
O l Support
S C tces
t Center l ed
involved.
i
c
rv i u i d
A system audit may be requested. -se t G s o den
c
ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Software Patch Categories: Access via MOS
General releases on My Oracle Support (MOS):

Have downloadable release notes
Are available without password

Include current recommended release
Include any prior recommended releases
Engineering release only:
Requires an SR for access to the code on MOS
Involves both support and engineering
s a
) ha
Can create download passwords
May not be visible on MOS
c om
Restricted release: i c es ide
Has an MOS article describing the patch -se
rv Gu
c s o dent
May have downloadable release notes ra Stu
p
May require an SR; Supportocan
f i n e this download passwords
@ create
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Downloading a New Version
https://support.oracle.com
p // pp
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u fer on the Support portal. You may need to contact Oracles Support
F
Check lfor
err nsversions
available
i g
Center n tra the correct code be posted to your portal account. Download the package to
ue to request
-
M no
the workstation from which you are administering the FS1-2 system. Verify that the new
version you downloaded is the correct version for your FS1-2. Software update packages
posted to Oracles Support Center FTP portal may be available upon request.
Clicking the Search button (shown in the slide) will display a list of available downloads.

Confirming Release and Classification
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
From thel F e
search n the available releases can be located and their classification
results,
u e
identified. - t r a
Mig non

Patch Read Me and Download
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u er
F err your
Beforelupdating n s f
FS1-2, review the patch Read Me notes for the version you are
u e t r a
- Read Me notes are patch Release Notes that describe new features,
Mig non
updating. The
capabilities, configuration requirements, operating constraints, and known issues and their
workarounds. The document also provides details about software and firmware dependencies
and any special requirements for performing an update.
Also refer to the Oracle FS1-2 Flash Storage System Release Notes, Release 6.x on OTN (in
this case, R6.1).

Patch Release Notes
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
l release
The primary n notes, available on OTN, cover the Major and Minor releases (6.1, 6.2,
u e t r a
- The patch release notes cover the details associated with the Patch, 6.1.7 in
Mig non
7.0, and so on).
the example in the slide.

Compatibility Matrix
2090-00001-06.01.07-0341.02
Field Description
2090 Class Code
00001 B
Base N
Number
b
06 Major Release Number
01 Feature Release Number (also known as as a
Minor) m )h
o c
e s
07 Patch Release Number
e r vic Guide
0341 Build Number s o -s ent
r a c tud
02 Build RevisionnNumber o @p this S
r r ufi use
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Every software n package contains a compatibility matrix. Each compatibility matrix is
update
u e t r a
- number. When a package is loaded onto an FS1-2 system, the latest version
Mofigthe compatibility
given a version
non matrix is loaded and kept on the Pilot. The matrix contains all information
regarding updated components, including their version and their dependencies relating to the
version of other components, such as hardware. This matrix is used to validate a software
update request.

Compatibility Matrix Field Details:
Field Name Description

Cl
Class Code
C d U d to id
Used identify
if Oracle
O l FS iitems (i
(internall use))
Base Number Assigned sequentially within a Class starting with

00001 (internal use)
Major Release Number Issued when significant changes and enhancements

have been made to the software
Feature Release No. Issued to release builds which contain a collection

s a
of smaller enhancements ) ha
c om
Patch Release No. Issued to intermediate releases containing i c es ide
specific
functionality updates - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Build Number Issued to each official
f i n e this of the Oracle FS
o@compilation
code baserru us
l f e t o
i g ue ense
Build Revision No.
o (m Issued
e licif patch builds are required (internal use)
fin rab l
r u
l F er nsfe
i g ue n-tra
M no

Package Naming Conventions
OracleFS-SW-060107-034100.x86_64.rpm
Field Description
OracleFS-SW Major
j Product Family
y
060107 Software Version
034100 Software Build and Revision a
s
X86_64 Processor ) ha
c om
rpm Di t ib ti F
Distribution Formatt i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The software
e updaten package is in Red Hat Package Manager (RPM) format and contains all
u e t r a
- FS1-2 software and firmware components. This slide provides a package
Mig non
of the relevant
name along with its description in the table.

Package Naming Convention Details
Field Name Format Description

Product Family OracleFS-SW Major product family.
Version 060107 Software Version

06 = Major Release Version
01 = Minor Release Version
07 = Patch Number
Build and Revision 034100 Software Build and Revision

0323 = Build Number s a
00 = Revision of the Build ) ha
c om
i c es Family
i d e
Processor x86_64
erv t Gu
FS1 Controller Processor
- s
c s o den
Distribution Format .rpm ra fileSformat.
Package
p tu
f i n o@ rpm
e th=isRed Hat Package Manager
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Verifying the Current Version
The currently
installed version
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
To initiate
e
an updaten via the Oracle FS System Manager, navigate to Software and
u e t r a
Firmware on- the Support tab. The current version can be identified as the Package version
Mig non
in the Installed Software and Firmware section. The Module version details are shown in
the body of that section. Note that not all Patch versions apply to all modules, so some
modules may show different versions than the Package version at the top.

FS1-2 System Updates: Staging the Software
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
After downloading nthe desired version to your local workstation, you must upload it to the
u e t r a
-performing the update. This is done by clicking the Upload Software Package
ig before
FS1-2
Mbutton n(ason
shown in the slide) and specifying the location of the *.rpm file on your
workstation.
Notes
Before performing an update, disable Call-Home to eliminate Call-Home messages
during the update process and remember to re-enable Call-Home after the update is
finished.
Even though Call-Home is disabled, it will not stop the system from collecting logs if an
event occurs. Sometimes an update will be put behind this task and you will need to wait
for that to complete before the update will proceed.

FS1-2 System Updates: Verifying the Staged Software
Staged version
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The FS1-2
euploads n and validates the package. This process is called staging. As the
u e - t r a
Mig non
package is staged, the FS1-2 extracts the software and firmware components from the RPM
package and checks each component. This process may take several minutes, depending on
the network speed and the size of the package. To verify or monitor the progress of the
upload, click the Tasks button on the status bar of the Oracle FS System Manager. After the
package is staged, the Staged Software section will display the new Package version and
indicate its upgrade status.

FS1-2 System Updates: Initiating the Update
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The uploaded and nstaged software can now be installed by right-clicking in the Installed
u e t r a
- of the content pane and selecting Update Software (or selecting Update
Mig non
Software area
Software from the Actions drop-down menu). An Update Software dialog box will appear.

FS1-2 System Update Software Dialog Box
Nondisruptive
versus
Disruptive
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
A full system restart associated with a software update is raree
s rv Gu
and
constitutes a Disruptive update. Always engage Oracleo
s - e n
Support before t
selecting to restart and update software. c
ra Stud
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
In the Update n dialog box, to ensure that the update is nondisruptive, select the
Software
u e t r a
ig nsoftware
Update
MSoftware n- without restarting system option. Do not select any of the boxes in the
oUpdate Options pane unless instructed to do so by Oracle Support.
Check with Oracle Support Center to verify that your code update is nondisruptive.
Updates may take more than an hour, depending on the release you are updating from, the
size of your system, the size of the update package, and activity on your system.
Click OK to begin the update.
To monitor the progress of the update, click the Tasks button on the Status bar.

FS1-2 System Updates: Validating the Update
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
Duringlthe
eupdate, nthe System Status icon on the Status bar may display yellow (warning)
u e t r a
- an update is being performed. Place the cursor over the icon to view the
Mig non
indicating that
message. This is a warning to other administrators so that they do not initiate other system
management tasks that could interfere with the update. No disruption of I/O is occurs and
performance is not degraded during an update. The system will assign a low priority to the
update so that I/O performance will not be impacted.

SNMP
Traps
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Sending SNMP Traps
Pilot2 ETH0
Pilot1 ETH0
Administrative
Workstation
FS1
Trap
SNMP
Trap Host
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
If a Simple
e
Network n Management Protocol (SNMP) management application is used to
u e t r a
- devices, SNMP trap hosts can be defined to receive Oracle FS1 Storage
Mig non
monitor network
System traps.
Any workstation that has an SNMP-based management application installed can be a trap
host. FS1-2 systems support SNMP version 2c. SET operations from SNMP management
applications are not supported.
Download the Management Information Base (MIB) for the FS1-2 from the FS Portal, Utilities
page, click the Utility Software link, and then click the Download Oracle FS System SNMP
MIB link. Install the MIB on the trap host.

To define an SNMP trap, perform the following steps:
1. Click the System tab.
2. Expand Global Settings in the navigation pane and click SNMP.
3 Select Create from the Actions drop-down
3. drop down menu
menu. The Create SNMP Host dialog box is
displayed.
4. Name identifies the SNMP host.
3. Enter values in the Host IP field and the Community string field. (public is the default.)
The Community string must contain at least six characters.
4. (Optional) Select the Receive traps option to enable the Trap Port Number field.
5 (Optional) Enter the Trap Port Number.
5. Number
- For SNMP queries, use port 161.
- For SNMP traps, use port 162.
8. (Optional) Select the Severity Threshold from the list of possible filters.
s a
Informational ) ha
Warning c om
Critical i c es ide
9. To save the SNMP configuration, click OK. - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Lesson Summary

Monitor multiple FS Systems from MaxMan
Gather system statistics, and performance and trending

information
Monitor system status and handle alerts
Configure notifications
Create, download, and view reports a
Collect system information and generate log bundles m) has
Describe how to use Guided Maintenance s co
r v ice uide
Describe how to perform system updates -se tG
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1. What is staging in the context of performing a software update on an Oracle FS

System?
2 On
2. O which
hi h navigation
i ti ttab
b can th
the E
Eventt L
Log b
be viewed?
i d?
3. How does the Oracle FS System classify events? s a

) ha
c om
i c es ide
4. What events will trigger Call-Home? - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
5. What report formats are availablerrfor u s e Generated Reports?
u downloading
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
i n l
faccessraisbrequired
r u
6. What levelrof
f e to perform Guided Maintenance?
e
l F tran s
u e -
Mig non
7. From where can MaxMan be downloaded?
8. What is the purpose of creating a Managed List of systems in MaxMan?
9. What two choices do you have for Monitored Events when setting up Event Notification?
10. Where are update packages available for download?

Practice
6-1: Install MaxMan and Create a Manage List

6-2: View Statistics and Trending Graphs
6-3: View and Filter Events

6-4: Create a Report Schedule
6-5: Generate
G a Report
6-6: Generate and Download a Log Bundle
6-7: Perform Guided Maintenance Drive Enclosure a
6-8: Verify the Current System Software Version ) has
o m
6-9:
6 9: Locate Software on My Oracle Support (MOS) e s c
6-10: Upload an Update Package e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
6-11: Update the FS1-2 System Software
r a c tud
@ p is S
6-12: Verify the Update n o th
r r ufi use
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
u e t r a
ig administrator.
system
Msingle
with other
non To prevent configuration conflicts, consult with your instructor to
determine if you are sharing your assigned FS1-2 system.
If you are sharing the training environment with other students, this practice should be
performed as a team.
Important: Refer to the Lab Environment Information for details on your assigned lab
equipment. If you have not been assigned a system, inform your instructor.

Practice 6-1
Install MaxMan and Create a Manage List
Overview
In this practice, you download and install Oracle MaxMan. You then configure Oracle
MaxMan so that it can monitor multiple FS1-2 and Axiom (if available) systems.
A
Assumptions
ti
This practice can be performed individually.
Something s a
) ha
c om to the FS
1. Log in to your assigned Windows host, open a browser session, and navigate
Web Portal
Portal. es
e r vic Guide
o - s nt
2. Locate and download the Oracle MaxMan installation
a s
c packageu de and perform an
installation of MaxMan. r
p is S t
n o @ th
u f i e
3. Open Oracle MaxMan (no password f t o us
err required).
l
ue ense
i g
o (m e lic
n toaopen
4. Click ManagefiList b l a dialog box.
u
rr sfer
F e
tran Credentials by entering the credentials of the primary administrator
uel n-Preferred
5.igEstablish
no for the lab FS1-2 systems (administrator/pillar). If you also have Axiom systems,
M account
the credentials will be the same.
6. Click the Add button. In the Add panel, enter the IP address of one of the FS1-2
systems in your pod. Leave the Use Preferred check box selected. Click OK.
7 R
7. Repeatt th
the previous
i step
t ffor each
h additional
dditi l FS1-2
FS1 2 and/or
d/ A Axiom
i tto which
hi h you h
have
access on your lab network.
8. After you have completed the list, click OK in the Manage the List dialog box.

9. Note that MaxMan will log in to each system and gather data to display.
10 Navigate
10. N i t tto each
h off th
the menu selections
l ti on the
th left
l ft to
t review
i the
th displayed
di l dddata.
t
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 6-2
View Statistics and Trending Graphs
Overview
In this practice, you access real-time statistics to view LUN and CPU.
Assumptions
Something
a
has
1. On your assigned Windows host, open the Oracle FS System Manager for your
)
assigned FS System. om c
e s
r v ic uide
2. Navigate to the SAN tab and select LUNs from the Statistics e
-s eand G
t Trending menu.
s o
c tud n
r a
p is toS this Windows host (in the lesson
3. Right-click one of the LUNs you created o @
and mapped
th
n Timee Statistics.
titled Provisioning) and select LUN u f i
Real
l f err to us
i g ue ense
4. Real Time Statistics(m for <YourLUN>
o l e licbottomwill appear with a two-part graph, the top showing
Total I/O Per fSecond
u i n aband the showing Total Latency. Keep this panel open on
F e rr sfer
your desktop.
u e l
- t r an
M5.igNownopenon IOmeter on your Windows host desktop. Select your Windows host under
topology, and then select the drive letter representing <YourLUN> to generate I/O on
your LUN.
6. Observe the activity in the Real Time Statistics for <YourLUN>.
7 Close
7. Cl IO
IOmeter
t and
d th
the R
Reall Ti
Time St
Statistics
ti ti ffor <YourLUN>.
Y LUN
8. Navigate to the System tab and select CPU Statistics from the Reports & Statistics
menu.

9. Select one of the Controllers and right-click your selection.
10. Click Controller CPU Real Time Statistics.
11. Observe the resulting graph for a time to allow the statistics to populate the graph.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 6-3
View and Filter Events
Overview
In this practice, you view and filter the event logs in the Oracle FS System Manager.
Assumptions
s a
) ha
View and Filter Events
om Event
1. In the Oracle FS System Manager, navigate to the System tab and cselect

Log under
nder Alerts and E
Events.
ents ces e rvi Guid
s e t
2. Scroll through the event listing to locate an eventalisted c so-with
u d e n
Severity Warning or
Critical. Right-click the event and select Event
r t
p Properties
S to view more details on
o @ h i s
the event. Close the Event Properties
r u finpanel.se t
l f er to u
3. From the Actions drop-down i g ue menu,e n seselect Set Event Log Filter.
o (m e lic
u f i n abl
F e
4. In the Set r
rEvent s f
Loger Filter dialog box, click the Help button and review the
e l
information
u - t r anthis dialog box.
for
Mig non
5. In the Set Event Log Filter dialog box, deselect Informational and click OK.
6. Scroll through the Event Log listing to verify that only Warning and Critical events
are listed.
Practice 6-4
Create a Report Schedule
Overview
In this practice, you create a reporting schedule via the Oracle FS System Manager.
Assumptions
s a
) ha
Create a Report Schedule
1. Open the Oracle FS System Manager for your assigned FS1-2.
c om
i c es ide
2. On the System tab, select Report Schedules in the navigation - s erv pane
t G uunder
Reporting and Statistics. c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
3. From the Actions drop-down menu, r r e
uselectuCreate.
s
e l fe e to
i u ens
gSchedule
4. In the Create Reporting
o m
( e lic dialog box, create a schedule by using the
following values:
u f i n abl
e
Schedule
F rr Name: s f er<yourname>-sched1
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Report Type: SAN Hosts
Enable: Select.
Select
Schedule: Daily
Recurrence: 1
5. Click OK to create a report schedule.
Practice 6-5
Generate a Report
Overview
In this practice, you generate a report via the Oracle FS System Manager.
Assumptions
s a
) ha
Generate a Report
m
coStatistics.
1. On the System tab, select Generated Reports under Reporting and
c e s e
e r vi Guid
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Generate. Click s
o- dHelp nt in the Generate
Report dialog box to review the report types available. c s e
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
3. In the Generate Report dialog box, r r e Type and click OK.
uselect ua sreport
e l fe e to
m i gu select
c e nsit in the context pane. Then from the Actions
( e li
4. After the report is generated,
o
drop-down menu,f i n b
select
a l
Download.
u
rr sfer
F e
el -tran Report dialog box, select a Format (CSV, Excel, HTML, PDF,
5.igInuthe Download
M XML),non
), browse to select a Target
g Download Path ((for example,
p , Desktop),
p), and enter
a file name for the file to be downloaded.
6. Click OK to download the report.
7. Navigate to the location of the downloaded file. Open and review the report file.
Practice 6-6
Generate and Download a Log Bundle
Overview
In this practice, you generate a log bundle via the Oracle FS System Manager.
Assumptions
s a
) ha
Generate and Download a Log Bundle
1. On the Support tab, select System Logs.
c om
i c es ide
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select Create. - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
3. In the Create Log Bundle dialog box, click
f i n o@
e thisbutton in the lower-right corner
the Help
and review the information for creating
f e r ru log ubundles.
s
l t o
i g ue ense
(m edialog
4. In the Create Log Bundle
o lic box, click Deselect All and manually select one or
in Component
more items infthe a l
b or Item pane. Select Most Recent Logs in the
r u r
l F erPeriod
Collection
n s fe and set the time to 8 hours.
pane
i g ue n-tra
M no
5. Click OK to g
generate the log
g bundle. On a p
production system,
y , the time required
q to
generate the bundle is determined by the amount of data to be gathered.
6. In the Systems Logs context pane, your log bundle will be listed as Manual under
the Collection Type column. Right-click the log bundle and note the different
functions that you can perform. Select Send to and Browse. Click the Browse
button in the Download Log Bundle dialog box and select a location on your client
system for the download.
Practice 6-7
Perform Guided Maintenance Drive Enclosure
Overview
In this practice, you will simulate replacing a failed disk drive in one of the Drive
Enclosures by using the Guided Maintenance Wizard to remove and replace a drive.
Assumptions
Make sure your instructor has assigned a lab system to you. If you have a partner, this
practice must be performed as a team. This activity must be performed on a local
hardware because you will need to physically remove and replace a drive from the
s a
FS1-2. h a )
o m
e s c
Di k D
Disk Drive
i R Replacement
l t
r v ic uide
1. From the FS1 GUI, navigate to System > Hardware > Drive e tG
-s eEnclosures and select
one of the Drive Enclosures. s o
c tud n
r a
p is S
o @
n View. thThe View Drive Enclosure dialog
2. From the Actions drop-down menu, select
u f i e
box appears.
l f err to us
i g ue ense
3. In the Replaceable(Unit
o m column, lic select a drive, and then click the Replace
Component button fin atrathe l e
b lower right. This will open the Guided Maintenance to
r u
l Fericon
the Introduction
theeStatus r a n s fe of the wizard. Note that if this drive had failed or was failing,
step
would display red or yellow.
u - t
Mig non
4. The drive you selected will be highlighted in green. Again, if this drive had actually
failed, it would be highlighted in red or yellow if the drive was in a warning state.
5. Click Next to advance to the next step.
6. In the Identify
y Hardware step,p click Identify.
y This will flash the LEDs on the front of
the drive. You can verify by going into the lab and checking the selected drive in the
selected DE.
7. Click Next. In the next step, the system will prepare the system for hardware
replacement. This will redirect activity from failed component to the redundant
component. This time when you click Next the selected drive will be taken offline.
Click Next.
Next
8. Read through the wizard instructions. Go into the lab and remove the selected drive
from the DE.
9. After you have seated the drive and locked it back into the chassis, return to the GUI
and click Next.
10.The last step in the wizard is Verify Replacement Successful. Normally, if anything
is wrong with the replacement drive, error messages will display now. If the status
p y Normal, click Finish.
displays
11.The wizard will close and you will be returned to the View Drive Enclosure dialog
box. The status will display Recovered and the DE will be in Warning state. a
s
) ha
omthe status
12.Because this is a simulation, there is one additional step required to return
c
to Normal. The FS1-2 has identified this drive as failed because i c es selected
you
i d e it for
removal. So you need to clear the Drive Failure History. Open
- s ervantFSCLI
G u session by
n
csoFSCLIecommand:
logging in as administrator. Then execute the following
p ra Stud
f i n o@ this <enclosure_name> -
fscli enclosure clearDriveHistory
r r u u s e
enclosure
driveSlot <slot #>
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
Where the enclosure_name o ( e liis formatted as /ENCLOSURE-01 and the slot # is the
f i n a b l
drive number. u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
MigThis nwillonclear the drive history and allow the drive to start its copyback and
e ent all return
eventually ret rn e
everything
er thing to a Normal status.
stat s
Practice 6-8
Verify the Current System Software Version
Overview
In this practice, you verify the version of the system software installed on your FS1-2.
Assumptions
If you have a partner, this practice must be performed as a team.
Verifying the installed version of system software

s a
) ha
1. On the Support tab, select Software and Firmware.
c om
2. What is the version of software installed on your FS1-2? i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
_____________________________________________
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
Congratulations! You have completed r r uPracticeu s e If you have any questions about
6-8.
this practice,
practice ask your instructor
instructor.
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Practice 6-9
Locate Software on My Oracle Support (MOS)
Overview
In this practice, you will verify the location of FS1-2 software on MOS.
Assumptions
Make sure that your instructor has assigned a lab system to you. In most cases, you will
have a lab partner.
Note: If you are performing this lab in the Oracle University training environment, a new
version of the Oracle FS system software has been saved to the desktop of your s a
Windows host system. Do not download a new version of software from MOS )unless ha
m
directed to do so by your instructor. co es ide
i c
Log in to MOS and locate FS1-2 Software - s erv t Gu
c s o den
1. From the browser on an available workstationp(not ra via the
S tuclassroom workstations or
FS1-2 host systems), navigate to:
f i n o@ this
r r u
https://support.oracle.com/ u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
2. Sign in using your Oracle
o l li
( ecredentials.
i n
uf ferab
r r
e n&s Updates tab, in the Patch Search panel, on the Search tab, select
l
3. Onethe FPatches
ra (Advanced) in the left navigation field.
i g u
Product n
or- tFamily
M no
4. Select Include all products in a family, and enter Oracle FS in the Product is
field.
5. Click the drop-down arrow at the right of the Release is field. Select the latest
g of the Search panel.
release available and click the Search button at the lower right
6. Verify that the Patch Advanced Search Results found a patch. Do not download the
patch unless directed to do so by your Instructor. Open the Read Me and review the
patch release notes.
Congratulations!
C l i ! You
Y have
h completed
l dPPractice
i 6 6-9.
9 If you have
h any questions
i about
b
Practice 6-10
Upload an Update Package
Overview
In this practice, you will upload the software update package from your desktop to your
assigned FS1-2 system.
Assumptions
have a lab partner.
s a
Note: If you are performing this lab in the Oracle University training environment,m ) ha a new
y
version of the Oracle FS system software has been saved to the desktop o
pcof yyour
c e s
efollowing
Windows host system. To upload the new version to your FS1-2,vperform
r i uthe
i d
steps: -se t G
s o den
c
ra Stu
p
Uploading (staging) an update package o@
f i n e this
Note: If enabled, disable Call-Home before
f e r ru performing
us an update.
l t o
i g ue ense
1. Log in to your assigned
o (m Windows
e lic host.
fin rab l
r u
l
2. Verify F erlocation
the n s fe
u e - t r a of the update package on your Windows host.
Mig non
3. Log in to the Oracle FS System Manager by using the Primary Administrator
account.
4. On the Support tab, select Software and Firmware.
5 Click
5. Cli k th
the U
Upload
l dS Software
ft P
Package
k b
button
tt iin th
the context
t t pane.
6. In the resulting Upload Software Package dialog box, browse to locate the update
package and select it (for example, OracleFS-SW-060107-
034100.x86_64.rpm). Click the Open button.
Note: The FS1-2 will upload or stage the software package. This may take several
minutes. To verify that the upload is in progress, click the Tasks icon on the Status Bar
in the Oracle FS System Manager UI. You should see a request titled Perform
Package Staging.
7. When the package is uploaded, verify that the package is shown on the Support tab
under Software and Firmware in the Staged Software section. Also verify that the
statement Can Upgrade to Staged Package: displays Yes. If not, check with
your instructor.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Practice 6-11
Update the FS1-2 System Software
Overview
In this practice, you will update the system software package by using the staged
package.
Assumptions
Make sure your instructor has assigned a lab system to you. In most cases, you will
have a lab partner. You must perform this lab as a team.
s a
Updating the FS1-2 System Software ) ha
c and om
1 In the Oracle FS System Manager,
1. s
Manager on the Support tab with Software
e e
rvicdrop-down
Firmware selected, select Update Software from the Actions uid menu.
se nt G
o -
r a cs tude
2. In the Update Software dialog box on the Details
@ p tab, i s Sverify that there are no error
messages displayed. Select Install ifin
f o version
newer th under Install Action, if not
u e
already selected.
l f err to us
i g ue ense
(m without
3. Click Update software
o e lic restarting system, unless directed to do
fin instructor.
otherwise byuyour ab l
r r f e r
e l Fe rans
u OK.n-t
4.igClick
M no
5. Monitor the progress of the update by clicking the Task button on the Status bar.
Note: Updates may take an hour or more depending on the release and features
included in the update package and the number and type of components installed in the
FS1-2.
After the software and firmware are updated, the Pilots restart. (Pilots are not in the
data path, so this action is consistent with a nondisruptive update. At this time, you will
receive notification that the Connection to the Pilot has been lost. After the Pilots
restart, you will be able to log in again to the UI (approx. 5 minutes).
Note: Most updates are nondisruptive (check with Support for more information). I/O
activity will not be interrupted during the update. The Pilots restart, which will end your
UI session and require you to log in again. Pilot management is separate from the data
paths. Therefore, the Pilot restart has no impact
p p on the I/O activity.
y
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Practice 6-12
Verify the Update
Overview
In this practice, you will verify that the update was successful.
Assumptions
have a lab partner.
Verifying the Update s a

1. In the Oracle FS System Manager UI, on the Support tab under Software m and ) ha
c o
c e s esection
Firmware check to see that the version shown in the Installed Software
Firmware, for
rvi Gthe
both Package version and Compatibility Matrix Version matches
s e uidversion for
the update you just completed. o- nt
cs tude
r a
p is S
2. After you have verified that the updatein o
was@ th re-enable Call-Home.
successful,
u f e
l f err to us
Congratulations! You have i g ue ensPractice
completed e 6-12. If you have any questions about
m
( e li
o c
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
7
Utilities s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Objectives

Download and extract the Oracle Flash Storage System
utilities
Access the command-line utilities
Execute basic FSCLI commands
Download and extract the Oracle FS Statistics Tools
Create and download a log bundle a
Extract statistics from a log bundle ) has
o
c m
Execute basic FS Statistics Tool commands ices
e r v Guide
Format statistical data o-s nt
r a cs tude
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

References
Technical publications on OTN:


Oracle Flash Storage System Statistics Tools Users Guide
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command-Line Interfaces
Client-Based Utilities
Utility Description
Enables administrative actions by means of commands from a
fscli
shell session; provides a simplified set of commands as an
alternative to the Oracle FS System Manager (GUI); can be
used to run commands and embed commands in scripts
pcli The command interface that is behind the FSCLI
FSCLI. pcli can be
used directly; however, pcli is undocumented and
unsupported. For Guidance, run an fscli command with the
debug option and you will see the underlying pcli.
System COD Viewer. It is used to take an extracted COD file s a
) ha
scv
and produces output in various formats for storage domains,
c om
volumes, enclosures, and so on. It is for engineering and
supportt use only.
l
i c es ide
fsstatsparser Translates binary data offloaded from s rv FS1-2
ethe G uSystem to be
formatted by fsstatsformatter s -
o den t
c
a Stu into comma-
fsstatsformatter Translates the output ofprfsstatsparser
separated value
f i n o
files
e thishuman readable
@that are
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
If the Oracle
e l FS t r a n Manager is not available, fscli can be used to obtain and execute
System
u - troubleshooting purposes from the Pilot.
Mig non
commands for
fsstatsparser and fsstatsformatter are bundled into the package called Oracle FS
Statistics Tools.

FSCLI
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FSCLI: Overview
The FSCLI is a client-based application that performs

administrative actions that are specified by command-line
arguments. It is downloadable from the Oracle Flash Storage

System.
Each CLI release is supported on systems that have the same
release number as the CLI:
Windows
a
Solaris 10 and 11 (SPARC, x86)
) has
Linux (RHEL, CentOS, OEL x86, SLES 11 x86) o m
MAC OS/X (x86)
( 86) e s c
e r vic Guide
Citrix 5.6 XenServer (x86)
s o -s ent
HPUX IA64 (future) r a c tud
p S
AIX 5 and 6 PPC (future) no@ this
r r ufi use
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u r
F err nsfeinterface
The FSl command-line (CLI), fscli:
u e t r a
client- software that complements the Oracle FS System Manager UI
Mig IsProvides
non a simplified set of commands as an alternative to the Oracle FS System
Manager UI
Can be used to run:
- Commands from the command prompt (via a shell)
- Scripts to run commands
- Request input files to run commands

Downloading the FSCLI Software
s a
) ha
c om
i c es OSide
Select the appropriate
- s erv t Gu
c s
Select e n OS
o thedappropriate
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The FSCLIF esoftwaren version must match the FS1-2 system software version. To ensure that
u e t r a
your versions- match, always download the FSCLI from the system that you are currently
Mig non
working on.
Download the FSCLI package to your local workstation and extract the files to a folder.

Extracting the FSCLI
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
The folder
e
that n the extracted files has everything that is needed for FSCLI to
contains
u e - t r a
Mig non
function.

FSCLI Command: Overview
The fscli utility:

Uses familiar conventions for parameters and options
Checks for required parameters, ranges, and values, and

issues specific error messages if they are not provided
Provides help text for each command
Uses consistent conventions across all commands
Supports automation through scripting by using standard a
shells ) has
Perl, Python, and so on c om
i c es ide
Uses existing management interfaces to avoid
- s ervschedule
t G u
disruption c s o den
Uses strings encoded in UTF-8@p is S
ra tu
u f i no e th
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FSCLI Help
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Running fscli with no arguments displays
n o @ thhelp
the is page shown here. The
available commands and parameters
r r ufi areuslisted
e below.
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
When you l F e
use thenparameters that are available, the fscli command can include any of the
u e - t r a Not all options are valid with every parameter.
i g
following options.
n
M no
-add
-delete
-modify
-list
-help

fscli Commands
account iscsi statistics

call_home job storage_allocation
clone_lun login storage_domain

controller logout system
drive_group lun system_alert
enclosure pilot system log
system_log
enclosure_console profile task
errors report time
event_log san topology
s a
) ha
event_notification san_host ups

om
haltpoint snmp_host version
c

es ide
host_g
groupp software update
software_update volume group
volume_group
i c
erv t Gu
hostmap
- s
o den
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Logging In to FS1-2 by Using FSCLI
You must use fscli to log in to the FS1-2 system before issuing any other
fscli commands.
From a shell or Windows command prompt, run fscli as follows:

All arguments on the command are required.
Either the FS1-2 host name or its IP address can be specified.
After successfully logging in, a session file is created in the users home
director This file contains the credentials and session information that is
directory.
needed for all subsequent commands.
10.123.123.101
s a
) ha
c om
i c es IP iofdthe
Public e FS1
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Note forl F e
former n CLI users: Unlike the Axiom CLI, the FSCLI login does not allow you
Axiom
u e t r a
to include the- password in the command line.
Mig non

fscli Command -help: Example
To get detailed information about using an fscli command, run

the -help command with the selected command.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Ending an FSCLI Session
$ fscli logout
Logout Successful
$
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
system command
system is an fscli command that displays or modifies the

Oracle FS System settings and performs maintenance
procedures. The list subcommand displays system

information.
$ fscli system list
System
Name : fs1.us.oracle.com
SystemStatus : NORMAL
s a
Storage ) ha
Available Capacity c om
Gigabytes : 98104 i c es ide
Bytes
-
: 105338414039040s erv t Gu
Used Capacity c s o den
: 0 p
ra Stu
Gigabytes
n o @ t h is Partial command
Bytes
r r ufi use
: 0 output displayed
Product Details
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Note: Objects are ncase-sensitive, commands are not.
u e - t r a
Mig non

Command Example
account command
account is an fscli command that manages administrator

accounts and displays information used to monitor administrator
session. The resetPassword subcommand resets the

password for the specified account.
$ fscli account resetPassword name admin-test currentPassword
Enter current account password:
Enter account password:
Reenter account password: Account ID
s a
) ha
Command Succeeded
c om
es ide
$
i c
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
pilot command
pilot is an fscli command that performs troubleshooting and

maintenance operations on the Pilots. The beacon subcommand
flashes the LEDs of the specified Pilot to identify the Pilot in the data
center. -timeout specifies the number of seconds the LEDs will
continue to flash.
$ fscli pilot pilot pilot2 beacon timeout 300

Command Succeeded
s a
) ha
$
c om
i c es ide
s rv G
efscli u
To determine which Pilot is active or standby, first run
s -
o den t pilot
list. c
ra Stu
p
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
Physically Identify Controller 1
Identify Controller 1
List the Controller FQN on the FS1-2 system:
$ ./fscli controller list

/CONTROLLER-01
/CONTROLLER-02
$
The requirement to beacon a Controller is to provide a specific a
FRU to be beaconed. To find the FRUs associated with ) ha
s
om
Controller 1, first obtain the details by executing the following
c
command: i c es ide
e v r G u
o-s
$ ./fscli controller -list -details
c s d e n t
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
The results on executing ./fscli controller -list

details displays all the components associated with both
controllers to be displayed. If you want to beacon only

Controller-01, you must look at just the Controller-01 output as
shown in the following:
Controller
Fqn : /CONTROLLER-01
Under this heading, there will be several subcategories, suchas a
as: m )h
o c
Chassis
Ch i e s
Motherboard e r vic Guide
s o -s ent
Processor r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
The Chassis subcategory does not display a chassis-fru-

number. You will beacon the number 0 as shown in the
following example:
$ ./fscli controller -beacon -controller
/CONTROLLER-01
/CONTROLLER 01 -chassis
chassis 0
Successful execution will display Command Succeeded.
s a
The number zero is the default object number for the Chassis entry.m ) ha
s co
r v ice uide
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
@ p is S
f i n o th
u e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
Physically Identify Enclosure 1
Identify Enclosure 1
List the Enclosure FQN on the FS1-2 system:
$ ./fscli enclosure list

/ENCLOSURE-01
/ENCLOSURE 02
/ENCLOSURE-02
/ENCLOSURE-03
$
To beacon a specific CRU/FRU on Enclosure 1, you need to s a
find the CRUs/FRUs associated with Enclosure 1. You must ) ha
first obtain the details by
y executing
g the following c
g command:
om
s e
r vic Guide
$ ./fscli enclosure -list -details -enclosure
e
/ENCLOSURE-01 o-s nt cs tude
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Command Example
Physically Identify Enclosure 1
Executing ./fscli enclosure -list -details -

enclosure /ENCLOSURE-01 displays all the components
associated with Enclosure 1. Because you want to beacon the

Chassis, you will use the numeric value of zero as shown in
the following example:
$ ./fscli enclosure -beacon -enclosure
/ENCLOSURE-01 -chassis 0
a
Successful execution will display Command Succeeded. as )h
To beacon individual components, such as SAS port c2oon m I/O
module
d l 1 (l
(located
t d on th
the ttop off th
the enclosure)
l ) offeE

s l e 11,
Enclosure
i c
rv Guid
execute the following command: s e
c s o- dent
$ ./fscli enclosure -beacon
p ra -enclosure
S tu
/ENCLOSURE-01 -iom 1 -sasPort o@ this 2
fin se
r u
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Topology
The FSCLI topology command monitors and performs

diagnostics on the topology of the back-end SAS
interconnects of an Oracle FS System.

Topology provides a mapping of the current SAS connections.
The
Th command d iis $ fscli
f li topologyl list.
li
Results of the command execution display the FS1-2 System
topology in multiple sections :
Statistics s a
) ha

Enclosure Connectivity
c om
Marks Database
i c es ide
Port Status
- s erv t Gu
Command details can be obtained with: c s o den
ra Stu
$ fscli topology help o@p
f i n e this
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
Note: You can
t r n or redirect the output for ease of reading.
pipe
a
u -
Mig non

Validating the FS1-2 Topology
$ fscli topology list: Provides the Controller port

status
$ fscli topology list statistics: Provides

Controller and enclosure ports statistics
$ ffscli
li topologyl list
li il Provides
details:
d P id ports t
status and statistics
$ fscli topology list enclosure: Provides status
a
of Enclosure ports
) has
$ fscli topology -list -details violations: c om
Provides a list of current cabling violations in thei c es ide
system
v er t Gu
- s
o den
c s
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Validating the FS1-2 Topology
The Enclosure Connectivity section provides a list of the

Controllers and Enclosures on the FS1-2 system including the
World-Wide Name (WWN) for each chassis. To produce this list,

use the following:
$ fscli topology -download
download topomap
topomap [filename]
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS
St ti ti
Statistics
Tool
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Oracle FS System Statistics: Overview
The Oracle FS System collects data on many system operations.

Each component of the Oracle FS System periodically collects
key data covering areas such as read/write performance, block-

level read and write performance, and error counts. This data can
be downloaded from the Oracle FS System Manager for analysis.
The Statistics Tools utilities make it possible to process these
statistics, which are in binary format, for analysis in statistical
applications and spreadsheets. The data can be used to:
a
Analyze the system to identify bottlenecks and determine what
) has
needs to be tuned to optimize performance om
c
Track
T k system t load
l d and d capacity
it i c es ide
Produce reports and graphs for visual analysis - s ervand t G u
c s o den
presentation p ra Stu
@ is
fino andthreporting applications
Integrate with existing monitoring
r u s e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
When analyzing n
statistics, the real-time statistics on the GUI (refer to the lesson titled
u e t r a
- Maintenance) provide an instance of performance data, whereas the system
ig nostatistics
Monitoring
Moperation nand
represent a longer period of time and include a systemwide collection of
statistics. These statistics can help determine whether the system is being fully utilized and
help determine sizing for future system expansion.

Statistics Tools: Overview
The Oracle FS System provides two statistics tools, Statistics Parser
and Statistics Formatter, to prepare and format data used for storage
management analysis.
The statistics tools are downloaded from the Oracle FS System and you
use these tools on your client workstation to perform tasks.
fsstatsparser.exe (Statistics Parser)
This is a command-line utility that translates the binary statistics
offloaded from an FS1-2 into a file that contains all the statistics
information specified.
a

This file is then formatted by the Statistics Formatter.
fsstatsformatter.exe (Statistics Formatter)
as )h
This is a command-line utility y that translates the output
m
pcoof
c s
e containe the
parser into comma-separated value (CSV) files ithat
v Gu i d
desired columns identified by name thatocover - ser anspecific
t time
c s e
range.
p ra Stud
You can run the formatter many
f i n o@ times
e t hison a data set to examine
different component areas, ru time sranges, and so on.
f e r o u
u e l se t
( m ig icen Copyright 2015, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
o l e l
i n
uf ferab
r r
Fewithrayour
To helpl you
e n s analysis, the statistical data can be sorted by Oracle FS System
i g u
component,
o n -t range, and other categories.
time
M n
fsstatsparser normalizes values in the data as follows:
Values that are counters show the difference between the current and previous data
points.
Accumulated times are normalized into nanoseconds and show the difference between
the current and previous data points.
Object identifiers for customer-defined objects (for example, LUNs) are replaced with
customer-chosen names.

System Statistics Process: Overview
Basic Steps
1. Download the statistics tools and extract them (one time*).
2. Collect system information (log bundle).

3. Download the log bundle.
4. Extract the contents of the log bundle.
5. Run fsstatsparser.exe (one time).
6. Run fsstatsformatter.exe (as many times as needed). s a
7. Analyze the output with applications such as spreadsheet. ) ha
om c
e s
Download the tools only once unless the systemssoftware e rvic G is u
ide
updated.
After an update, Oracle recommends thatcyou s o-download
e n ta new
package of tools, replacing the old version. p ra Stud
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Downloading the Oracle FS Statistics Tools (Step 1)
fsstatstool-windows.zip
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
The statistics tools nare downloaded via the FS Web Portal from the Utilities Software tab. The
u e t r a
package files- are as follows:
Mig non
Oracle FS Statistics Tools for:
Windows: fsstatstool-windows.zip
Linux: fsstatstool-linux.tgz
Solaris 10/11 x86: fsstatstool-sunos-10-x86.tgz
Solaris 10/11 SPARC: fsstatstool-sunos-10-sparc.tgz

Extracting the Statistics Tools from the Archive (Step 1)
Extract the contents of the .tgz or .zip file to a directory of your

choice, having at least 200 MB of free space.
For Linux or Solaris, use tar to extract the files from the
downloaded .tgz archive file.
F
For Windows,
Wi d use a zip
i utility
tilit to
t extract
t t the
th files
fil from
f the
th
downloaded .zip archive file.
The extracted files are: a
s
fsstatsparser.exe
) ha
fsstatsformatter.exe c om
fsstatsdefinitions.html i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
When extracting
l n contents of the .tgz (Linux or Solaris) or .zip (Windows) file, in
the
u e t r a
- two executable files listed in the slide, an .html file is extracted. It describes
Mig non
addition to the
the various pieces of information that can be displayed by the tools.

Collecting and Downloading System Information (Steps
2 and 3)
Select other
options as needed.
Select Statistics plus other

items for data analysis
analysis.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv Addt G u
notes as needed
c s o de(for n example, support
p ra Stu case number)
@ i s
u f i no e th
l f err to us
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
To collect system
t r a ninformation, navigate to Support > System Logs. Select Create from the
u - (or right-click in the context pane). You can select to have the log bundle
Mig non
Actions menu
downloaded to your workstation. Click Deselect All, and then select Statistic and any
additional items to generate the data bundle needed for analysis. Make other selections as
needed for the Collection Period and SAN Host Log Selection.
Note: Selecting Statistics is always required. Selecting System Configuration is highly
recommended.

Collecting and Downloading System Information (Steps
2 and 3))
Tasks will show the

s a
) ha
progress of the system
collecting and
c om downloading the
i c es ide b dl
bundle.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
Accumulation n information may take several minutes. The status bar at the bottom of
ofasystem
u e - t r
Mig non
the window indicates that activity is taking place. When the creation of the TAR file is finished,
in addition to the file being downloaded, a local copy will be made and will be displayed on
the System Logs page.

Alternative Download of System Information (Step 3)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
To select F e
and n the log bundle from the Systems Logs to your local workstation,
download
u e t r a
right-click the- appropriate log bundle in the context pane and select Send To > Download.
Mig non
Browse to select a path, and then click OK.

Statistics Bundle (Step 4): Extracting First Pass
The Statistics Bundle downloaded is a compressed (.tar) file

containing multiple (.tar.gz) archive files that need to be
uncompressed to extract the .xml and other files needed for

preprocessing with fsstatsparser. Windows example:
s a
Original Statistics
) ha
Bundle
c om
First Pass
i c es ide
erv t Gu
Uncompressing the
original bundle will produce
- s
o den
multiple compressed
c s
archives that need to be
p ra Stu
uncompressed.
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Linux andl F e
Solaris nusers can use the tar command to extract the contents. Windows users
u e t r a
will need an -extraction utility that is able to understand both the ZIP and TAR formats.
Mig non
The data files that contain the statistics you need to process are a collection of multiple TAR
files that are then compressed. You will therefore need to perform multiple extractions to
extract the final data files.

Statistics Bundle (Step 4): Extracting Second Pass
Second
2st Pass
Pass
Uncompressing
Uncompressing the
will
will
produce
producemultiple
multiple.tar
.tar
fileswhich
files that need to beto
all need
beunarchived.
unarchived.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
The second
l e n
uncompress will extract .tar files from the .tar.gz files.
u e - t r a
Mig non

Statistics Bundle (Step 4) Extracting 3rd Pass
33rd
rd Pass
Pass
Un-archive
Un-archive the
the .tar
.tar files
files to
to
extract the data files.
extract the data files.
s a
Additional data files (.xml, .dat,
) ha
etc.) are extracted and the
PillarStatistics folder is c om
created, which contains additional
i c es ide
.dat files.
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
The third
l F e
pass willnextract the data files from the .tar archive files. Now the data files are
u e - t r a
i g
ready for fsstatsparser.
n The FS Statistics Tools must be located in the parent folder of
no
Mthe PillarStatistics folder. If the tools are not already in this folder, move them to this
folder.

Running the Statistics Parser (Step 5)
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
No options or parameters are f i n o@ when
needed e thisrunning the parser.
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
With the
t r a n now located in the same folder as the PillarStatistics folder, you can
fsstatsparser
u
ig nthe
execute - to preprocess the data files. To do this in Windows, you need to open a
parser
MCommand onPrompt session. The result of running fsstatsparser is an fsstats.sps file,
which will be processed, along with the other data files, with the fsstatsformatter utility
next.

Running the Statistics Parser (Step 5)
When the parser is run, you

can see the processing of
data files scroll by. This may
take several minutes

depending on the amount of
data being processed.
s a
fsstats.sps is created by ) ha
the parser and is required for c om
the formatter.
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
The result
l e
of runningn fsstatsparser will be an fsstats.sps file, which will be processed
u e t r a
- the other data files, by using the fsstatsformatter utility.
Mig non
next, along with

Running the Statistics Formatter (Step 6)
s a
) ha
In this example, the options used do the following: c om
-m (Creates separate data files for each component, subcomponent,
i c es andi d e
statistics type)
- s erv t Gu
-o=mystats.cvs (Directs output to files prepending
c s d e n to the file
o mystats
name creating multiple .csv files for each
p a Stu subcomponent,
rcomponent,
and statistics type)
f i n o@ this
-V (Specifies verbose output) rru
fe e to use
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F
The output
l e
of n which processes the fsstats.sps file created by
u e t r a
fsstatsformatter,
- can be written to STDOUT or directed to an output file (mystats.csv in
ig example).
non It is in CSV format for easy import into Excel or another analysis tool. It is easy
fsstatsparser,
Mthis
to select by statistics component type, date, or time. The definitions of all statistics fields are
provided.
Example Commands:
fsstatsformatter: Writes to STDOUT the data (in CSV form) for all statistics in the
fsstats.sps file
fsstatsformatter -c=PI -s=Port -o=pi.csv i=james.sps: Writes to
pi.csv
i th PI P
the Portt statistics
t ti ti ffrom th
the james.sps
j i
inputt file
fil
fsstatsformatter -c=PI -T=120110:10:00:00,120110:10:05:00: Writes to
STDOUT all PI statistics for the time range 10:00:00 to 10:05:00 AM (local client time)
on Dec 1, 2010, from the default fsstats.sps file

Running the Statistics Formatter (Step 6)
Resulting .csv files

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Analysis (Step 7) Viewing .csv file in MS Excel
Selected the file mystats_BS_UI.csv
Component: BS = Block Services

Type: UI = User interface statistics
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
Blue
Blue columns
columns willwill be
be
s e rv Gu
selected
selected for
for aa charting.
charting.
c s o dent
-
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Sample of Formatted Statistics (Step 7)
Selected a 2-D
2 D line
chart. Resulting in the
chart below.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
s e rv Gu
Use sort to organize
s o - e n t
the data as desired. In c
ra Stud
this example data was p
sorted by time.
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Statistics Grouping
FS System statistics are grouped by component (for example,

RAID), subcomponent, and statistic type (for example, user
interface). The statistics presented vary by component. Types:

Module Name Description
BS Block Services Supplies all read and write cache management, including
mirroring
DMS Diagnostics & Runs diagnostics and monitors various components of
Monitoring Services the system a
DPS Data Protection )
Provides the functions necessary for backup services has
Services c om
RAID Redundant Array of Provides a disk subsystem that rconsists i c esof aidseteof
Independent Disks drives and a Controller that-s e v tasGa usingle logical
operates
drive c s o den
p
Provides the host
a Swith
rnetwork tu a SCSI interface to the
SAN Storage Area
Network f e this to LUNs
o@Controller
FS1 onianSAN
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
Additional terms:
- t r an
Mig Duration:

non
The amount of time in seconds that data was collected
Statistics Bundle: The portion of the system information collection that contains
statistical data
Stats time: The time the system began collecting data for the software module
component
Statistics type: The type of statistical data
Subcomponent: A constituent part of the primary component, known as resource types

Statistics Definitions
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
For a detailed n
description of the component and subcomponent and type statistics, refer to
u e - t r a
Mig non
the fsstatsdefinitions.html file, which is part of the Statistics Tools package.

FS Statistics Help via the h Option
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
When executed
l n the h option, fsstatsparser and fsstatsformatter provide help
with
u e t r a
in the form of-Man Pages.
Mig non

Lesson Summary

Download and extract the Oracle Flash Storage System
utilities
Access the command-line utilities
Execute basic FSCLI commands
Download and extract the Oracle FS Statistics Tools
Create and download a log bundle a
Extract statistics from a log bundle ) has
o m
Execute basic FS Statistics Tool commands e s c
r v ic uide
Format statistical data -s e tG
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Review Questions
1. Where can the FSCLI utility be accessed?

2. What operating systems are supported for FSCLI?
3. What is the FSCLI command line for displaying the FSCLI commands?
s a
) ha
c om
4. Explain what the following command sequence does: i c es ide
$ fscli login u administrator oracleFS -s erv t Gu
10.0.0.1
c s o den
Password:
p ra Stu
Login Successful
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe> fsevents-2015-04-04.txt
e to
$ fscli event_log list
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
5. What
u e - r an do?
l doesttopology
Mig non
6. How do you access topology?
7. Describe what the following command does:

$ fscli topology -list
8. What does the fsstatsparser.exe command do?

9. Where does the data that is analyzed by the FS Statistics Tools come from?
10. What does the fsstatsformatter command produce when executed on the
output of the fsstatsparser command?
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice
7-1: Download and Extract the FSCLI

7-2: Execute the FSCLI Commands
7-3: Use the storage_allocation Command to Create a

Map
7-4: Download and Extract the FS Statistics Tools
7-5: Generate and Download a Statistics Bundle on FS1-2
7-6: Extract Statistics from the Log Bundle a
) h as
7-7: Execute the Parser to Prepare Statistical Data
c om
7-8:
7 8: Execute the Formatter to Format the Data as c s e
eCSV
i
rv Guid
7-9: Use MS Excel to Display and Chart the- s e
Data t
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
u e t r a
Mig non
system with other
single administrator. To prevent configuration conflicts, consult your instructor to determine if
you are sharing your assigned FS1-2 system.
If you are sharing the training environment with other students, this lab should be performed
as a team.
Important: Refer to the Lab Environment Information for details on your assigned lab system.
If you have not been assigned a system, inform your instructor.

Practice 7-1
Download and Extract the FSCLI
Overview
In this practice, you download and extract the FSCLI software.
Assumptions
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1-2 system for your team.

a
as
1. Log on to one of your assigned Windows hosts, and from there, start a browserhsession
)
to access the FS Web Portal. om c
e s
r v ic uide
2. Locate and download the Windows CLI package. e
-s ent G
s o
c tud
r a
p isyour S local host.
3. Extract the contents of the CLI package to o a@folder on
h
r u fin se t
l f er to u
4 Review
4. R i th
the contents
t t off the
g e ttonverify
th folder
fuld s eif that
th t the
th fscli.exe
f li command d iis present.
t
( m i i c e
l
Congratulations! u f
Youi nohaveacompleted
b le Practice 7-1. If you have any questions about this
e r r f e r
practice, ask n s
l Fyourtrainstructor.
u e -
Mig non

Practice 7-2
Execute the FSCLI Commands
Overview
In this practice, you will execute selected FSCLI commands.
Assumptions

a
has
1. From your Windows host, make sure that you are in the directory where the extracted
)
fscli.exe command resides. om c
2 Using
2. U i FSCLI
FSCLI, llog iin tto your assigned
i d FS1
FS1-2
2 system.
t e s
r v ic uide
3. After you are logged in, execute the following command: -s e t G
s o
c tude n
C:\> fscli | more
r a
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
4. To display help about a specific command
f e us
rr to(parameter), specify the command followed
by help
help, as shown in the followingl
ue eexample:
se
i g n
o (m e lic
C:\> fscli account f i l
n ab-help
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig display
5. To
non
the administrative accounts, enter the following:
C:\> fscli account list
6. To add an administrative account, enter the following:

C:\> fscli account add name <name> role admin2 email
<name>@somewhere.com fullName
fullName <firstname lastname>
Enter account password:
Reenter account password:
...
Command Succeeded
C:\>
Log in to the GUI and verify that the above account information is correct.

7. To verify that the new account was created, what FSCLI command would you
execute?
8. To log out of the FSCLI, enter the appropriate command.

this practice,
practice ask your instructor
instructor.
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Practice 7-3
Use the storage_allocation Command to Create a Map
Overview
In this practice, you use the FSCLI to create a configuration map.
Assumptions
Create a Storage Allocation Map

s a
1. If you are not already logged in via the FSCLI, do so now.
) ha
c om
2. Create a subdirectory for the output of the configuration map command. i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
3. To generate a configuration map of your FS1-2 system,
p ra execute
S tu the following:
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e > allocation.txt
fe e to
C:\> fscli storage_allocation -list
e l
m i gu cens
Note: Allow sufficient time
o ( for thee i
lcommand to execute and complete the creation of the
f i n b l
e r f e ra may take 2 to 4 minutes.
ru configuration
output file. A small
l F tran s
u e
ig viewnothen-results, navigate to the location of the output file and open it.
4.MTo
C:\> more allocation.txt
practice, ask your instructor
practice instructor.

Practice 7-4
Download and Extract the FS Statistics Tools
Overview
In this practice, you download and extract the FS Statistics Tools to your local Windows
host.
A
Assumptions
ti
a
Download and Extract the FS Statistics Tools
) has
1. Log on to your assigned Windows host and create a folder off root (for o
c m
example,
\stats).
\stats) es
e r vic Guide
o - s nt
2. Start a browser session to access the FS Web Portal.
a s
c tude
r
p is S
o @ th for Windows package.
3. Locate and download the Oracle FSrStatistics u fin seTools
l f er to u
i g ue ense
4. Extract the contents of ( mthe Statistics
i c package to the \stats folder on your local host.
l
u f i no able
5. Review F e
the
r
rcontents s f eofr the folder to verify that the following commands are present:
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
fsstatsdefinitions html
fsstatsdefinitions.html
fsstatsformatter.exe
fstatsparser.exe
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 7-4.

7 4 If you have any questions about this

Practice 7-5
Generate and Download a Statistics Bundle on FS1
Overview
In this practice, you generate a statistics bundle on your assigned FS1-2 and download it to
your local Windows host.
A
Assumptions
ti
Generate and Download a Statistics Bundle on FS1-2 s a

m the
1. Log in to your assigned FS1-2 and navigate to Support > System Logs.oFrom ) ha
c
Actions drop-down menu, es dialog
menu select Create to open the Create Log Bundle box
box.
e r vic Guide
o - s nt
2. In the Create Log Bundle dialog box, choose Deselect
a s de then select Statistics
c All,tuand
& System Configuration. r
p is S
n o @ th
u f i e
3. Under Collection Period, select f errlogstoSince
All
us Last Log Collection.
l
ue ense
i g
o (m e lic
4. Under Notes, enter
u f i n abl for stats analysis or similar statement.
Bundle
F e rr sfer
5. At u e
the
llower left,
- t r anselect Download to: and navigate to the same directory where the
ig Tools
MStats nonare located. Click OK. Allow a few minutes to download.
6. Note that the bundle will appear in the System Logs in the GUI.
7. Return to your Windows host and verify that the log bundle has arrived.

Practice 7-6
Extract Statistics Data from the Log Bundle
Overview
In this practice, you will extract the statistics data files from the compressed log bundle.
Assumptions
Extract Statistics Data

a
1. On your assigned Windows host in the folder where you downloaded the log bundle
) has and
extracted the FS Statistics Tools, use 7-Zip to do a first pass extractionoof
c mthe log

s e move
bundle If the statistics tools and the log bundle are not in the sameedirectory,
bundle. directory
them. This will simplify the processes that follow. rv i c uid
o - se nt G
r a cs tude
2. Use Windows Explorer to view and verify that several
@ p is<filename>.tar.gz
S files have
been extracted from the bundle. Now delete
u f i no theeoriginal
th log bundle. (If you need it again
for any reason, you can downloadeitrrfrom theuFS1. s Remember that a copy of the same
l b
log bundle
dl iis available S ue
il bl iin Systems
t l f L e )
Logs.) t o
i g e n s
o m
( e li c
3. Now, in Windows f i n b
Explorer,
a lselect all of the <filename>.tar.gz files and do a second
u
rr of sthese f er files with 7-Zip. Verify that you now have an equal number of
e
pass extraction
F
u e l
-
<filename>.tar. t r an Delete the <filename>.tar.gz files.
Mig non
4. Perform a third pass extraction with 7-Zip of the <filename>.tar files. Again, verify
that you now have unarchived the files leaving a number of .xml, .dat, and other files.
Also, verify that the PillarStatistics folder has been created and contains .dat
files. Delete the <filename>.tar files, leaving only the fully extracted data files.
Congratulations! You have completed Practice 7-6.

7 6 If you have any questions about this

Practice 7-7
Execute the Parser to Prepare Statistical Data
Overview
In this practice, you use the fsstatsparser command to prepare the extracted statistical
data.
A
Assumptions
ti
Execute the Parser to Prepare the Statistical Data s a

) ha
1. On your Windows host, open a Command Prompt session and navigate
c om
to the location
of the Stats Tools and extracted data files
files. es
e r vic Guide
o - s nt
2. Run the following (making sure that both the tools and sdata fileseare in the same folder
and that the PillarStatistics folder is alsoppresent): rac Stud
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
C:\stats>
\ fsstatsparser
p
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
( e li
ofor
3. Allow sufficient ftime
i n athe
b lcommand to process the files and verify that an
u
rr fileshas f er been created in the current folder.
fsstats.sps
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non You have completed Practice 7-7. If you have any questions about this
Congratulations!

Practice 7-8
Execute the Formatter to Format the Data as CSV
Overview
In this practice, you execute fsstatsformatter to format the statistical data as comma-
separated value (.csv) files.
A
Assumptions
ti
The instructor has assigned you to a team and assigned an FS1-2 System for your team.
Execute the Formatter to Format the Data as CSV s a

) ha
c om in Practice
1. On your Windows host, in the same command prompt session that you used
7-7 execute the following command:
7-7, es
e r vic Guide
s o -s Vent
C:\stats> fsstatsformatter m o=mystats.csv
r a c tud
@ p is S
f i n o th
Notes u
rr mystats e
us csv to generate files that use the
In this example,
example the formatter will l f euse t o
ue name stoeprepend the final filename. .csv will be used as the
mystats.csv
mystats portion of the output i g e n
extension on that name.o (mTheename lic information between the mystats and .csv is in three
parts: component, finsubcomponent,
ab l and type (for example, mystats_SAN_Lun_Error.csv).
r r u f e r
e l Feassign
You can
r a n s name for the -o option, the formatter will produce CSV formatted files
any
i g u
regardless
o n -oft the file name. If the final output files do not have the .csv extension, you will
M need nto rename the files to include the .csv extension.
C:\stats> ren mystats*.xx mystats.csv
2. Verify that you now have a number of mystats_<name>.csv files in the current folder.

Practice 7-9
Use MS Excel to Display and Chart the Data
Overview
In this practice, you use MS Excel to display and chart data from one of the .csv files
created in the previous practice.
A
Assumptions
ti
a
Parse the Statistical Data
) has
om
1. Open the <name>_BS_UI.csv file in MS Excel and review the contents.
c
e s
r v ic uide
2. Delete rows 1 through 4 such that the column headers are e
-sin row 1.
t G
s o
c tude n
r a
p is S data for a chart by
3. Open the Insert tab in Excel, and then select o @(cntl+select)
th
nH (Read_Operations),
selecting column A (statsTime), column r u f i s e and column O
((Write_Operations). ) r
fe e to u
p
e l
m i gu cens
o ( e li
4. Select a chart format
f i n l charts menu (for example, Line). Verify that a chart is
frombthe
a
generated.err u f er
l F an s
u e - t r
Mig non You have completed Practice 7-9. If you have any questions about this
Congratulations!

A
Lab Environment s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x A - 2

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

To uniquely identify your configuration and to avoid conflicts with other students
who are sharing the lab environment, wherever you see <student#> in the practices,
substitute your student number (for example, s1 or stu1).
Common Lab Network Environment BROOMFIELD, CO

Category Parameter Value

B
Broomfield
fi ld Lab
L bNNetworkk AD Domain
D i NName edu.oracle.com
d l
DNS Domain Name edu.oracle.com
Gateway 10.24.5.1 (Direct = 10.150.44.1)
a
has
DNS Server #1 IP 10.24.5.4 )
10 24 5 6 sc
om
DNS Server #2 IP 10.24.5.6
i c e ide
NTP Server #1 IP erv t Gu
10.24.5.2
- s
c s o10.24.5.6
d e n
NTP Server #2 IP
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
Common Lab Network Environment r r u us eREADING, UK
e l fe e to
Category m i gu cens
Parameter Value
o ( e li
fin rAD l
abDomain Name
r r u
Reading Lab Network
f e edu.oracle.com
e l Fe rans DNS Domain Name edu.oracle.com

u - t
Mig non Gateway 10.24.5.1 (Direct = 10.160.30.1)
DNS Server #1 IP 192.32.3.251
DNS Server #2 IP 152.68.154.3
NTP Server #1 IP 10.160.8.12

Students 1 & 2 FS1 and MaxRep Environment
FS1-2 (primary or source) Name brmfs1
IPs 10.24.5.110 (public IP)
Credentials administrator/pillar
Students 1 & 2 Host/Server Environment

s a
) ha
Windows Host Name EDBPR1P1 (win-01)
IP com
10.24.5.10 (Direct = 10.150.44.100)
s e
c e
Credentials
rvi Guid
Administrator/e1car0
s e
HBA WWPN (port1) s o- dent
21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-76
c
HBA WWPN (port2) p ra Stu
21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-77
f i n o@ this
Oracle Linux Host Name
r r u u s e
EDBPR1P2 (lin-01)
f e o
l se t 10.24.5.11 (Direct
IP
g u e n ( = 10.150.44.101))
i
(m e lic e
f i n o
Credentials
b l root/oracle
r ru HBA f e a (port 1)
rWWPN 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-78
F e s
u e l
- t r an HBA WWPN (port 2) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-79
M i g o n
Solaris Host
n Name EDBPR1P3 (sol-01)
(sol 01)
IP 10.24.5.12 (Direct = 10.150.44.102)
Credentials root/oracle
HBA WWPN (port1) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-7E
HBA WWPN (port2) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-7F

Students 3 & 4 FS1 and MaxRep Environment
FS1-2 (primary or source) Name brmfs2
IP 10.24.5.120 (Public IP)
Students 3 & 4 Host/Server Environment

s a
) ha
Windows Host Name EDBPR2P1 (win-02)
IP com
10.24.5.13 (Direct = 10.150.44.103)
s e
c e
Credentials rvi Guid
s e
HBA WWPN (port1) s o- dent
21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-16
c
p ra Stu
HBA WWPN (port2)
f i n o@ this
21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-17
Oracle Linux Host Name r r u u s e
EDBPR2P2 (lin-02)
f e o
l se t 10.24.5.14 (Direct = 10.150.44.104)
IP u e
( m ig icen
o
Credentials
l e l root/oracle
f i n b
a (port 1)
e r ru HBA f e rWWPN 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-7C
l F n s
i g ue n-tra HBA WWPN (port 2) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-7D
M n o
Solaris Host Name EDBPR2P3 (sol-02)
IP 10.24.5.15 (Direct = 10.150.44.105)
HBA WWPN (port1) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-12
HBA WWPN (port2) 21-00-00-24-FF-57-D4-13

Students 5 & 6 FS1 and MaxRep Environment (Reading)
FS1-2 (primary or source) Name readingfs1
IP 10.24.5.110 (Public IP)
Student 5 & 6 Host/Server Environment (Reading)

s a
Windows Host Name EDU1R61P1 (win-01 ) ) ha
c om
IP 10 24 5 10 (Direct = 10
10.24.5.10
i c es160 30
10.160.30.201)
i d
201)
e
Credentials s erv t Gu
-
c s o den
HBA WWPN (port1) ra Stu
21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-02
p
@ this
HBA WWPN (port2) ino 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-03
r u f s e
Oracle Linux Host Name r u
fe e to EDU1R61P2 (lin-01)( )
e l
u ens
IP mig c 10.24.5.11 (Direct = 10.160.30.202)
( l i
u f i no a b
Credentialsle root/oracle
r r f e r
e l Fe ransHBA WWPN (port 1) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-05
u - t
Mig non HBA WWPN (port 2) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-06
Solaris Host Name EDU1R63P3 (sol-01)
IP 10.24.5.12 (Direct = 10.160.30.213)
HBA WWPN (port1) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-A6
HBA WWPN (port2) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2E-A7

Students 7 & 8 FS1 and MaxRep Environment (Reading)
FS1-2 (primary or source) Name readingfs2
IP 10.24.5.120 (Public IP)
Students 7 & 8 Host/Server Environment (Reading)

s a
Windows Host Name EDU1R62P1 (win-02) ) ha
c om
IP 10 24 5 13 (Direct = 10
10.24.5.13
i c es160 i30
10.160.30.204)
d
204)
e
Credentials s erv t Gu
-
c s o den
HBA WWPN (port1) ra Stu
21-00-00-24-FF-54-2D-AC
p
f e this
HBA WWPN (port2) ino@21-00-00-24-FF-54-2D-AD
f e r ru usEDU1R62P2 (lin-02)
Oracle Linux Host Name
e l e t o ( )
IP mig
u ens 10.24.5.14 (Direct = 10.160.30.205)
( l i c
u f i no b
Credentials
a le root/oracle
r r f e r
e l Fe ransHBA WWPN (port 1) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-31-F8
u - t
Mig non HBA WWPN (port 2) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-31-F9
Solaris Host Name EDU1R64P3 (sol-02)
IP 10.24.5.15 (Direct = 10.160.30.216)
HBA WWPN (port1) 21-00-00-24-FF-54-2D-FE
HBA WWPN (port2)
( 2) 2 00 00 2
21-00-00-24-FF-54-2D-FF
2

B
Hardware Details s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
FS1
Pil t
Pilots
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x B - 2

FS1-2 Pilot Dimensions and Weight
Height = 1.7 in / 42.6 mm

Width = 17.185 in / 436.5 mm
Depth = 29 in / 737 mm
Weight = 40 lbs / 18 kg
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot: Overview
Systems shipped on or after the R6.2 GA date will be equipped

with X5-2 Pilots. X4-2 and X5-2 Pilots function identically. FS1-2
systems equipped with X4-2 Pilots will be supported with X4-2

parts for the life of the system.
Feature X4-2 Pilot (2-1U servers) Nashua X5-2 Pilot (2-1U servers)
2.5 GHz 4-core Intel Xeon E5-2609 v2,
CPU 2.4 GHz 8-core Intel Xeon E5-2630 v3, 85 W
80 W
Memory 2-8 GB DDR3-1600 DIMM 2-8 GB DDR4-2133 DIMM s a
) ha
HDD 1-300 GB 10k RPM SAS 1-600 GB 10k RPM SAS
c om
SAS HBA 8-Port
8 P t 6 Gbps
Gb SAS-2
SAS 2 PCI
PCIe 8
8-port
t 12 Gbps
Gb SAS-3
SAS 3 PCI es(E
PCIe t )
(Estes)
e r v Guide
i c
ILOM R3.1.2.10.b r7770
-s ent
R3.2.4.42 r9937
s o
OS Oracle Enterprise Linux 6.3 (2.6.39) a
Oracle
r cEnterprise
tudLinux 6.6 (3.8.13)
p S
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot Clustering
The FS1 Pilots are a redundant high-availability active/passive

failover pair.
Pilot is the name of the cluster and of each node.

Failover is automatic and can be issued via CLI.
X4-2 OS is Oracle Linux 2.6.39-400.109.5el6uek.x86_64 #1
SMP Tue Jul 23 16:40:27 PDT 2013 x86_64 GNU/Linux.
X5-2 OS is Oracle Linux 3.8.13-68.1.2.e17uek.x86_64 #2 a
SMP Mon Mar 30 11:45:57 PDT 2015 x86_64 GNU/Linux.) ha
s
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

300 GB Boot Drive in HDD0 (HDD1-8 e/w fillers)
Labels applied at system integration
CAT 6e CAT 6e
PMI to FS1 Controller-2 s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
erv t Gu
PLT
2
Serial Link
- s
o den
rolled null modem
c s
CAT 6e PMI
p ra Stu
o@ this
PLT
1
u f i n e PMI to FS1 Controller-1

r r u s
fe e to
CAT 6e
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Pilot Connections
From l F e n
u e - t r aTo Purpose Type
ig Net0
Pilot-1 Net Mgmt Pilot-2 Net 2 Heart Beat 10GigE Copper RJ45
Pilot-1 Net 3 Customers Ethernet Customers Management Network 10GigE Copper RJ45

Pilot 2 Net Mgmt
Pilot-2 Pilot 1 Net 2
Pilot-2 Net 3 Customers Ethernet Customers Management Network 10GigE Copper RJ45

600 GB B
Boot D
Drive
i iin HDD0 (HDD1
(HDD1-8
8 e/w
/ fill
fillers))
Labels applied at system integration
CAT 6e CAT 6e
s a
) ha
To Customer Management Network PMI to FS1 Controller-2
c om
i c es ide
Serial Link
- s erv t Gu
rolled null modem
CAT 6e
c s o den PMI
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e PMI to FS1 Controller-1
fe e to
CAT 6e CAT 6e
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
Pilot Connections
F e
From l
u e - t r aTon Purpose Type
ig Net0
Mgmt
Ethernet
Pilot-2
Pilot 2 Net Pilot 1 Net 2
Mgmt
Ethernet
FS1-2 (X4-2) Pilot CRUs 2.5 GHz 4-Core Intel Xeon E5-2609 V2, 80 W CPU
with pre-greased CPU heatsink
4-Slot 2.5 Disk Backplane Assembly
8 GB DDR3-1600 DIMMs, 1.35 V Riser Board Assemblies
Fan Modules for CPU P0
FM0
P0
FM1
6 Gbps SAS-2
s a
) ha
PCIe HBA
FM2
c om
P1 c e s Battery
3e

i i d V Lithium
- s erv t Gu Coin Cell

600W Power Supplies
FM3 c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r uP0 DIMMs,
8 GB DDR3-1600
u s e 1.35 V
e l fe e to
for CPU
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
Caution:F e
Refer ton the FS1 System Handbook for current and complete information on CRUs.
u e t r a
ig not
MCRUs n-
noshown:
1U snap
snap-in
in slide rail rack mount kit (see page 15)
1U Cable Management Arm (Snap-in) (see page 20)

Pilot FRUs Versus CRUs (Oracle Server X4-2)
Pilot Component Type Hot Notes
Swap
Motherboard Assembly FRU No The Pilot Guided Maintenance
Procedure redirects the user to a set
Disk Backplane
of instructions located on the Pilot in a
Internal SAS Cables PDF file. GM will shut down the Pilot
in preparation for FRU/CRU
CPU (2.5 GHz 4-Core E5-2609
replacement.
v2)
Heat Sink
SAS HDD (300 GB)
Disk Cage/Front Indicator Module s a
3 V Coin Cell Battery CRU No ) ha
c om
8 GB DIMMs (DDR3(DDR3-1600)
1600) No
i c es ide
8-Port 6 Gbs SAS-2 HBA No
- s erv t Gu
Power Supply Yes c s o den
PCI Express Riser No @
pra is Stu
u f i nNoo e th
err to us
Fan Module
l f
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F err Handbook s f er
See thel System
e t r a n for part numbers and details on CRUs and FRUs.
u -
Mig non

Pilot FRUs Versus CRUs (Oracle Server X5-2)
Pilot Component Type Hot Notes
Swap
Motherboard Assembly FRU No The Pilot Guided Maintenance
Procedure redirects the user to a set
Disk Backplane
of instructions located on the Pilot in a
Internal SAS Cables PDF file. GM will shut down the Pilot
in preparation for FRU/CRU
CPU (2.4 GHz 8-core E5-2630
replacement.
v3)
Heat Sink
SAS HDD (600 GB) Note: The X5-2 components are NOT
interchangeable with the equivalent
Disk Cage/Front Indicator Module X4-2 components. s a
3V Coin Cell Battery CRU No ) ha
c om
8 GB DIMMs (DDR4
(DDR4-2133)
2133) No
i c es ide
8-Port 12 Gbs SAS-3 HBA No
- s erv t Gu
Power Supply Yes c s o den
PCI Express Riser No @
pra is Stu
u f i nNoo e th
err to us
Fan Module
l f
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot LEDs
Disk Drive LEDs
Ok to Remove
Service Required
OK/Activity
Front LEDs
Service Processor
Locator Button & LED

Service Required
Power OK
Power Button
s a
Rear LEDs
) ha
c om Power Supply LEDS
i c es ide Service Required
erv t Gu
AC OK
- s
o den
c s
p ra StuPower OK LED
f i n o@ this Service Required

Locator LED
r u s e
l f er to u
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l LEDs
DiskuDrive
- t r an
Mig non
Name Color Status
OK to Remove Blue The Drive can be removed safely
Service Required Amber OFF Normal operation

STEADY ON Drive fault condition
OK/Activity Green OFF Power is off or drive not recognized

STEADY ON Drive is engaged and power is on
STEADY BLINK Drive Activity

Front Operator Panel LEDs
Name Color Status

Locator Button LED White OFF Pilot is operating normally.
FAST BLINK Locate Indicator
Service Required Amber OFF Normal Operation

STEADY ON Fault Present
Power OK Green OFF AC power is not present.

STEADY BLINK Standby power is on.
SLOW BLINK Startup sequence has been initiated.
STEADY ON Pilot is powered on.
s a
) ha
Fan Fault Amber OFF Normal state; no service required
memoryy DIMMs c om
STEADY ON Service required for fans, processors, or
i c es ide
Service Processor LED (ILOM) Green erv t Gu
FLASHING SP is booting.
- s
s
STEADY ON Normal
c d e n
o Operation
praoperation,
S tuno service required
his power supply service required
Power Supply Fault Amber OFF @ Normal
f i n
STEADYo ON tIndicates
r ru us e
Rear LEDs
l f e t o
g e nseOFF Normal operation, no service required
uAmber
System Over Temperature
( m i i c e STEADY ON Over-temperature warning condition
l
u f i no able
Power Supply
F e rr OK sfer
AC Green OFF No AC power present
u e l
- t r an SLOW BLINK Normal operation, AC power on, DC
Mig non output no enabled
p , AC power
STEADY ON Normal operation, p on,, DC
power enabled
Locator LED Same as front panel
Service Required LED Same as front panel
Power OK LED Same as front panel

Pilot: ILOM Block Diagram
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The ILOMF e
ports n cabled and used by each Pilot to monitor the other Pilot. These cables
are
u e t r a
- be disconnected unless instructed to do so by Oracle Support.
Mig non
should NEVER
ILOM Network: 169.254.2.x

Netmask: 255.255.255.252
Eth3 Broadcast: 169.254.2.11
USB Broadcast: 169.254.2.7
Local ILOM: 169 254 2 5 (using usb0)
169.254.2.5
Remote ILOM: 169.254.2.9 (using eth3)

FS1-2 Pilot Power
Dual redundant hot swappable power supplies

600W output
Voltage 110 127 / 200 240 VAC

50 60 Hz
Two power supplies per
Pilot node
1.42 A @ 208 V for s a
both nodes ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Pilot with CMA Installed
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1
C t ll
Controllers
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller Dimensions and Weight
Height = 3.43 in / 87 mm
Width = 17.52 in / 445 mm Controller
Number Display
Depth = 20.78 in / 527.8 mm
Weight = 40.8 lbs / 18.5 kg
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller Top View
4 GB DDR3
NVDIMMs Fi F
Five Fan Modules
M d l
Two-Slot PCI Express Riser Board
16 GB
DDR3
DIMMs
for CPU P1
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r
16 GB DDR3r uDIMMs use
l
for
e fe P0 e to
CPU
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller: Rear Image
660 W Power Supplies Inter-node control CAT 6e
Connections PMI to FS1 Pilot-2
CU-2
CU-1
4 5 CAT 6e 6 CAT 6e
CAT 6e
CAT 6e
For For
Serial PMI
1 2 Link 3
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide NET3 NET2 NET1 NET0
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
SER MGT NET MGT
p ra Stu
Label: CLUSTER INTERCONNECT
f i n o@ thisPorts: 0 |O|O| 1 |O|O| ---
r r u u s e CAT 6e
l f e t o PMI to FS1 Pilot-1
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
u e l
- t r anController PCI Slot Assignments
Mig non
FS
Sl t #
Slot NAS/SAN HBAs
HBA SAS HBAs
HBA
1 First
2 Third (DEs 21-30)
3 First SAS HBA (DEs 01-10)
4 Second
5 Third
6 Second SAS HBA (DEs 11-20)

Cable End Connection End Connection Cable Type
(Right to Left)
Controller
C t ll
NET0
To Customer Ethernet
NAS Connectivity
Switch
Controller
NET1
PMI Controller Opposite Controller

NET2 NET 2
PMI Controller (1 & 2) Pilot (1 & 2)

Cat 6 Ethernet
NET3 Net 1
s a
Inter-node Controller Opposite Controller ) ha
Network Port Cluster Interconnect Net Mgmt
c om

----
i c es ide
s e rv Gu
Inter-node Controller o dent
-
Opposite Controller
c s
Network Port NET MGT raInterconnect
Cluster
p S tu
n @ this
o---
r u f i s e
r
fe e to u
e l
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Controller FRUs
Controller Component GUI Type Hot Notes

GM Swap
Motherboard Assembly FRU No

No
Motherboard cable kit
4 GB NVDIMMs
Yes Must be Support user to initiate GM
CPU
Heat Sink
Disk Backplane a
s
Controller ID display
) ha
LED Alarm Board Assembly No c om
i c es ide
Power Distribution Board
s e rv Gu
Chassis
c s o dent
-
Riser Board Assembly p ra Stu
ESM Yes f i n o@ Must
e thisbe Support user to initiate GM
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
Caution: The
t
FS1
r a nController hardware (X3-2L Server) has been specially modified for use in
u -
Mig non
the FS1. Therefore, it should NOT be maintained as if it were a standard server. The
components in an FS1 are uniquely configured and deliver a complete Engineered Storage
Solution. When maintaining the FS1, the system should be treated as a single system rather
than a collection of parts. Doing otherwise could result in taking a system offline and data
loss.
Note: See the System Handbook for part numbers and details on parts.

Controller CRUs
Controller Component GUI Type Hot Notes

GM Swap
16 GB DIMMs Yes CRU No

Fan Module Yes
SAS PCIe 6 Gb/s HBA Yes Code name = Thebe-2
FC PCIe 16 Gb/s HBA Yes Code name = Ganymede-Q
NAS PCIe 10 GigE HBA Yes Code name = Niantic
Air Filter No Yes s a
) ha
Power Supply Yes
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Base Model NVDIMM and DIMM Locations
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Performance Model NVDIMM and DIMM Locations
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 NVDIMM Connection to Midplane
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
Midplane Connectionsfino
@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
Note: Color
e coding n(blue) of DIMMs in this image are for clarity and distinction of slots. It is
u e t r a
- of equipped or unequipped slots.
Mig non
not an indicator

FS1-2 NVDIMM Connection with Air Duct Removed
Mid-Plane
-Connects ESMs
NVDIMMs to power and

bulkhead
connectors
Cable
-From bulkhead
connector to
s a
NVDIMM) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller Energy Storage Module LEDs
1
2
3
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
No
No. Location Color Name State and Meaning
1 Top Blue Ready to Remove On ESM can be removed as a hot-plug
operation.
Off Do not remove the ESM.
Flashing Initializing
2 Middle Amber Attention Service On Normal fault detected

Required
Off No faults detected
3 Bottom Green OK / Activity On ESM is functional without fault.
Off ESM is off or initializing.

FS1-2 Controller Front Panel LEDs
1
2
3
4
5
6
s a
) ha
c om
7
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
8
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
ig Name
MNo. non Color Status
1 Locator LED White OFF Controller operates normally.
FAST BLINK Locate indicator
2 Service Action Required LED Amber OFF Normal Condition

ON Indicates Service is required
3 Power LED Green OFF AC Power is not present.

present
STEADY ON System Power is on.
FAST BLINK System in standby mode
SLOW BLINK System is booting.
4 Power Switch NA
5 Service Processor LED (ILOM)
( ) Green FLASHING SP is booting.
b
STEADY ON Normal operation

No. Name Color Status
6 Power Supply LED Amber OFF Normal operation
ON Indicates fault in one of the power
p
supplies
Fault or Alarm LEDs Critical Red Critical

7 Fault or Alarm LEDs Major Red Critical

Fault or Alarm LEDs - Minor Amber Warning
8 User Alarm LED Amber ON Indicates user alarm condition
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller Rear Panel LEDs
s a
1 2 3 4 ) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
1 Power Supply Status LED Top Green ON Output Power is OK
OK.
Power Supply Status LED Amber ON Service Required
Middle
Power Supply Status LED - Green ON Input Power is OK.
Bottom
2 Ch i St
Chassis Status
t LED Left
L ft Whit
White OFF Normal
N lOOperation
ti
FAST BLINK Locate indicator
Chassis Status LED Center Amber OFF Normal Operation

ON Service Required
Chassis Status LED - Right Green OFF System Power off

ON System
S t P
Power on
FAST BLINK System in standby mode
SLOW BLINK System booting

3 Network Management LED Green ON or BLINKING A link is established
OFF No link established
Amber ON or BLINKING Link is operating at

100 Mb/s
OFF Link is operating at 10 Mb/s
4 Net0 to Net3 Status LEDs Left Green ON or BLINKING A link is established

OFF No link established
Net0 to Net3 Status LEDs Right Amber ON Link is operating at 1 GigE
Green ON Link is operating at 100 Mp/s

a
) has
OFF Link is operating at 10 Mb/s
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller PCIe Card LEDs
16 Gb/s FC Dual Port
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
10 GigE Dual Port Ethernet rv
- s e t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Controller: ILOM Block Diagram
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l
The ILOMF e
ports n cabled and used by each Controller to monitor the other Controller.
are
u e t r a
These cables- should NEVER be disconnected unless instructed to do so by Oracle Support.
Mig non
ILOM Network: 169.254.2.x
Netmask: 255.255.255.252
Eth2 Broadcast: NONE
USB Broadcast: NONE
Local ILOM: 169.254.2.5 (using usb0)
Remote ILOM: 169.254.2.9 (using eth3)

FS1-2 Controller Power
Dual redundant hot swappable power supplies

660 W output
Voltage 110 127 /

200 240 VAC
50 60 Hz
2 power supplies per Controller
6.8 A @ 208 V per node s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1-2 Controller with CMA Installed
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

FS1
Di
Drive
Enclosures
s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

Drive Enclosure Add Sequence: Example
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
0 1 2 0 1 2
1st DE in String Ports Ports
(Head-of-String) IOM-0 IOM-1
Drive Enclosure s a
) ha
Controller 01 Controller 02 om
1st DE of String
c
SAS HBA P Portst SAS HBA P Ports t IOM 0 P
IOM-0 Portst
i c esIOM-1
IOM 1 P
i d e t
Ports
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1
- s er2v t 0Gu 1 2
---------------------------------------
c s o den
--------------------------------------- pra S tu
n o@ this
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
f i
r r u u s e
---------------------------------------------------------------------
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
In the example
e n in this slide and the next several slides, you connect Drive enclosures
shown
u e t r a
to Ports 0 on-SAS HBAs in the Controllers.
Mig non
The Controllers are interconnected via Ports 2 and 3 on the SAS HBA cards in similar slots
(black cables in this example). SAS HBAs in Slots 3 are interconnected to each other.
Similarly, the SAS HBAs in Slots 6 would be interconnected, and the SAS HBAs in Slots 2
would be interconnected. For simplicity, these interconnections will not be shown in the
subsequent slides.
Port connects are shown in graphical and tabular format.
For the first Drive enclosure, the I/O Module connections to the Controllers are:
IOM-0 Port 0 connects upstream to Controller-01 SAS HBA Port 0.
IOM-1 Port 0 connects upstream to Controller-02 SAS HBA Port 0.

Adding the Second Drive Enclosure
FS1 C
Controller
t ll 01 FS1 Controller
C t ll 02
SAS HBA PORTS Existing cable SAS HBA PORTS
3 2 1 0 removed and 3 2 1 0
reconnected when
adding the second DE
Existing Cable
Do Not Disconnect
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
Ports Ports Ports Ports
IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1
1st Drive Enclosure 2nd Drive Enclosure s a

) ha
Controller 01 Controller 02 1st DE of String
c om 2nd DE of String
SAS HBA Ports SAS HBA Ports
IOM 0 P
IOM-0 Ports
t IOM 1 P
IOM-1 Portst IOM 0 P
IOM-0
i c est id
Ports IOMe
IOM-1 1 PPortst
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0
- s erv t Gu
1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
s o den
------------------Existing Cable------------------- -------------New---------------
c
Existing Cable
------------Moved Cable
------------Existing ------------------
Cable-----------------
p ra Stu
----------------------New--------------------
Reconnected
to 2 DEnd
f i
-------------------------Reconnectedn o@ this
to 2e DE------------------------------------
nd
f e r ru us
l t o
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
After installing
t
the
r a nsecond Drive enclosure, the cabling steps are:
u -IOM-0 Port 0 of the second Drive enclosure to IOM-0 Port 1 (red cable) of the
Mig1. Connect
non
st Drive
first eeenclosure.
c osu e
2. Remove the connection from IOM-1 Port 0 of the first Drive enclosure and reconnect it to
IOM-1 Port 0 (green cable) of the second Drive enclosure.
3. Connect IOM-1 Port 1 of the second Drive enclosure to IOM-1 Port 0 (green cable) of the
first Drive enclosure.

Adding the Third Drive Enclosure
FS1 C
Controller
t ll 01 FS1 Controller
C t ll 02
SAS HBA PORTS Existing cable SAS HBA PORTS
3 2 1 0 removed and 3 2 1 0
reconnected when
Existing Cables adding the second DE
Do Not Disconnect
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
1st Drive Enclosure 2nd Drive Enclosure 3rd Drive Enclosure

s a
) ha
Controller 01 Controller 02 1st DE of String
c om IOM-1
2nd DE of String 3rd DE of String
es ide Ports
SAS HBA SAS HBA
IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0
Ports Ports
i c
erv t Gu
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 0
-
1 s
o den
2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
c s
----------------Existing------------------ --------Existing--------- -----------New----------
p ra Stu
---------------Existing------------
Existing Cable
n o @ this -----------------New---------------
-------------------------------Moved----------------------------------
------------------------------Existing---------------------------------
Reconnected
r u fi s e
to 3 DErd
r
-------------------------------Reconnected u
fe e tofrom 3 DE-------------------------------------------
rd
e l
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F
After installing
e the nthird Drive Enclosure, the cabling steps are:
u e t r a
- IOM-0 Port 0 of the third Drive enclosure to IOM-0 Port 1 (red cable) of the
Mig1. Connect
non
seco d Drive
second ee
enclosure.
c osu e
2. Remove the connection from IOM-1 Port 0 of the second Drive enclosure and reconnect
it to IOM-1 Port 0 (green cable) of the third Drive enclosure.
3. Connect IOM-1 Port 1 of the third Drive enclosure to IOM-1 Port 0 (green cable) of the
second Drive enclosure.

Adding the Fourth Drive Enclosure
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
Existing Cables
Do Not Disconnect
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
s a
0 1 2 0 1 2 ) ha
Ports
IOM-0
Ports
IOM-1
c om
4 Drive Enclosure th
i c es ide
s e rv Gu
1 DE of String
st 2 DE of String nd 3 DE of String
c s o dent 4 DE of String
- rd th
IOM-0 Ports IOM-1 Ports IOM-0 Ports IOM-1 Ports IOM-0 Ports
p ra IOM-1StPorts u IOM-0 IOM-1
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1
f i n
2
o@ this0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
e
u -----------------------------New------------------------
s
----------------------------------------------New--------------------------------------------
r r u
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
After installing the nfourth Drive enclosure, the cabling steps are:
u e t r a
- IOM-0 Port 0 of the fourth Drive enclosure to IOM-0 Port 2 (red cable) of the
Mig1. Connect
nonst Drive
first eeenclosure.
c osu e
2. Connect IOM-1 Port 0 of the fourth Drive enclosure to IOM-1 Port 2 (green cable) of the
second Drive enclosure.

Adding the Fifth Drive Enclosure
3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0
Existing Cables
Do Not Disconnect
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
s a
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
) ha
om
Ports Ports Ports Ports
IOM-0 IOM-1
5 Drive Enclosure es
c
IOM-0

IOM-1
4 Drive
Di E Enclosure
th l
i c th
i d e
1 DE of String
st 2 DE of String
nd 3 DE of String rd 4 DE-s ofe
rv
String t G
u
5 DE of String
th th
IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1 IOM-0 IOM-1 c s o dIOM-1

IOM-0 e n IOM-0 IOM-0
Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports p
Ports ra PortsStu Ports Ports Ports
0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1
f i n o@ this
2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
r r u u s e
-----------------------------------New-----------------------------------
e l fe e to ----------------------New-------------------
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
l F e
After installing the nfifth Drive enclosure, the cabling steps are:
u e t r a
- IOM-0 Port 0 of the fifth Drive enclosure to IOM-0 Port 2 (red cable) of the
Mig1. Connect
non
seco d Drive
second ee
enclosure.
c osu e
2. Connect IOM-1 Port 0 of the fifth Drive enclosure to IOM-1 Port 2 (green cable) of the
third Drive enclosure.

SAS Cables
SAS mini SAS mini SAS HD

-mini cable Connector Connector
General Routing Table (cable types and lengths)
From
Cable Type* Length
Component Location
s a
SAS HD-HD Controller Cabinet 1 Controller Cabinet 1 )h
3 meters
a
o m
Cabinet 1sc3 meters
SAS HDHD-mini
mini Controller Cabinet 1 DE2-24P/C
DE2 24P/C
i c e ide
SAS HD-mini Controller Cabinet 1 DE2-24P/C e
s rv 2*Gu6 meters
Cabinet
s -
o Cabinet
e n t
SAS mini-mini DE2-24P/C Cabinet 1 c
DE2-24P/C
r a t u d 1 3 meters
SAS mini-mini DE2-24P/C
p is S Cabinet 2 6 meters
Cabinet 1 @DE2-24P/C
f i n o th
u s e
l f e r to uCabinet
*HD = High Density / Cabinet 2 =rExpansion
i g ue ense
u f i n abl
F e rr sfer
e l
IOM ports use
t
SAS
r a n mini-mini cables.
u
ig Cables -
MSAS non are routed between Controller SAS HBA ports by using SAS HD cables, between
SAS HBA ports and Drive enclosure IOM ports by using SAS HD-mini
HD mini cables, and between
Drive enclosures.

C
Review Questions s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non
Lesson 1: Review Questions
1. Describe the function of QoS Plus.
QoS Plus provides QoS-driven adaptive automated data movement to the most cost-
effective class of storage.
2. What does MaxMan enable the Storage Administrator to do?
A graphical user tool that aggregates monitoring notification from multiple FS1 and/or
Axiom 600 systems into a single display
3. What are Storage Profiles?
Storage Profiles
St P fil provide id predefined
d fi d provisioning
i i i Q QoS
S andd I/O attributes
tt ib t tto d
deliver
li one-
click provisioning for Oracle and non-Oracle applications.
4. Describe four use cases for Storage Domains.
Storage Domains are data isolation containers that can be used to secure data or s a
a
) h or
workloads to a physical location, create all flash domains, separate user groups,
m
refresh aging Drive Enclosures without disruption. co es ide
rvic
5. What are the three main hardware building blocks for the FS1?
s e G u
Pilots, Controllers, and Drive Enclosures
s -
o den t
6. The main FS1 management interface is called?
c
ra Stu
p
Oracle FS System Manager f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
7. Which hardware component can
e l febe eadded to to increase storage capacity?
Drive enclosures
m i gu cens
8. What type of disk o ( e lused
drives are
i for storage?
f i n ab l
SAS HDDs r r uand f
SSDse r
e l Fe rans
i g u
o n -t
M n
1. How many levels of priority queueing are available on each Storage Class?
Five (Premium, High, Medium, Low, and Archive)
2. LUNs can be configured as one of two tiering types, what are they?
Auto-tiered or Single-tiered
3 What
3. Wh t is
i access skew?
k ?
The ratio between hot and cold data
4. Each of the RAID types available on the FS1 can be described as having what parity?
RAID 5 = Single Parity, RAID 6 = Double Parity, RAID 10 = Mirrored Parity
5. What is RAID C?
COD or CConfiguration
fi ti on Di
Disk
k iis used
d tto store
t th
the system
t configuration
fi ti iinformation
f ti on
each drive.
Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x C - 2

6. Describe overcommitted capacity in the context of Thin Provisioning.
It is when the maximum addressable capacity is larger than the capacity actually
installed.
7. Storage Domains provide you the ability to do what with the FS1?
Create virtual storage machines or containers isolating data.

8. To what does 1-Click provisioning refer?
Storage Profiles
9. End-to-end data integrity checking is achieved using what standard?
10T PI
10. Name all of the storage classes available on the FS1.
s a
Performance SSD, Capacity SSD, Performance HDD, and Capacity HDD
) ha
c om
Lesson 3: Review Questions i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
1. What Graphical User Interfaces are available for thesOracle
c o dFS e nStorage System in
Release 6? p ra Stu
Oracle FS System Manager and Oracle n @ this
oMaxMan
r f i
u forusthe e
f e
2. What type of utilities can be downloaded r t o Oracle FS Storage System?
l
ue enProviderse
Oracle FS Volume Copy i gService
Oracle FS System o (m eMIB
SNMP lic
fin rTool
ab l
Oracle FS r r u
Statistics
f e
l e ns
FFlash
i g e
Oracle
u n - traStorage Path Manager (available on OTN)
M Oracle noStorage Data Protection Manager (available on OTN)
3. For those who do not want to run an installer package on Windows, what options exist
for downloading and running the Oracle FS System Manager?
Download a Java Runtime Environment
4. What is the default system IP address?
10.0.0.2
5. What account is not permitted to access user data?
Support account
6. What is the purpose of the System Status icon?
To indicate the overall status of the FS1 providing three possible states: Normal,
Warning, or Critical
7 O
7. On which
hi h ttab
b iin th
the O
Oracle
l FS S
System
t M
Manager can you check
h k th
the status
t t off the
th Pilots,
Pil t
Controllers, and Drive Enclosures?
System tab

8. Where is the Oracle FS System Manager downloaded from?
FS Web Portal
9. What event severities are displayed in the Event Log?
Informational, Warning, and Critical
10. What is displayed by clicking the identified items on the status bar?
a) Overall System Status
b) Hardware Status
c) Current user sessions
d) Background processes
11. Where in the GUI would you enable Call-Home Triggering?
a
has tab
System tab > Global Settings > Networking > Actions menu > Modify > Notification
)
12. Name three properties that are configured in a Storage Profile: o m
e s c
Name, RAID Level, Read Ahead policy, QoS Priority, Storage
r c uide
viClass
13. To move a Drive Group from one Storage Domain to o e t G Domain what
-s eStorage
another
s
c tud n
major steps are involved? r a
Remove the DG from its current Domainoand @ padd the
i s S
DG to a new location.
fin se t h
r u
l f er to u
Lesson 4: Review Questions i g ue ense
1. What is LUN mapping? o (m e lic
u f i n abl
rr which
Configuring
e f r can access a LUN
ehosts
F an
l Active/Active s
g u e
2. Describe - t r Asymmetric LUN Access.
i o n
M BothnControllers actively handle I/O for LUNs assigned to each independent of each
other.
3. List the benefits of using FSPM.
Enables LUN multipathing, integrates into the FS1 management system, enforces OS
updates, enables host log collection on the FS1, manages multiple paths ensuring
optimal paths, load-balances traffic across all available paths, reduces failovers and I/O
p
hot spots
4. What does it mean when a host is shown as Hostname Unknown in the Storage >
Hosts window of the Oracle FS System Manager?
The FS1 is unable to resolve the host name without FSPM or a manual association of
the SAN host name.
5. How are Clone LUN and Copy LUN different?
Copy LUN is a block level with configurable QoS whereas Clone LUN is a point-in-time
read/write snapshot.

6. Where do you get FSPM software?
The FSPM software can be downloaded from OTN (Oracle Technical Network).
7. Where do you install the FSPM software?
Install FSPM on all Windows, Linux, Solaris, AIX, and HP-UX servers to which you plan
to provision LUNs to from the FS1.

1. What components protect the FS1 from data loss in the event of a power failure?
The Non-Volatile DIMMs and the Energy Storage Modules
2. What are the two options for Controllers?
s a
Base Model and Performance Model ) ha
p
3. What is the base operation system
y for Pilots? c om
i c es ide
Oracle Linux
- s erv t Gu
4. How many SAS HBAs are required to support 18 Drive
c s d e n
o Enclosures?
Two per Controller or four per FS1 p ra Stu
5. Describe the optional configurations for f i n the e this equipped with 1.6TB SSDs.
o@DE2-24P
f e r ru us
q pp with 7,, 13 or 19 SSDs
Equipped l
e nse t o
6. How many DE strings can i g ube supported
e by the Performance model FS1?
( m l i c
Six
u f i no able
7. The ESM e r
rprovides f r
eapproximately how many minutes of power to the NVDIMMs?
l F n s
i g ue to three
Two
n - traminutes
M no
8. If a MaxRepp engine
g is mounted in the Oracle FS1 rack,, what rack unit p
positions will it
normally occupy?
Rack Units 17 - 20
9. How many AC lines are required to supply the single-phase vertical PDUs in an Oracle
FS1 rack?
Four
10. What is the purpose of the Pilots in an FS1 configuration?
System management and configuration, monitoring, and alerts
11. Ideally, where in a string would you add a DE2-24P equipped with SSDs?
Close to the Controllers
12. What is the proper cable routing when cabling between two racks for the FS1-2 system?
With FS system located adjacent and SAS cables routed horizontally across and
between racks

1. What is staging in the context of performing a software update on an Oracle FS
System?
This is when the FS1-2 uploads and validates the package.
2. On which navigation tab can the Event Log be viewed?
System
3. How does the Oracle FS System classify events?
By Category and Severity
4. What events will trigger Call-Home?
Critical events
5. What report formats are available for download of Generated Reports?
s a
CVS, Excel, HTML, PDF, or XML
) ha
6. What level of access is required to perform Guided Maintenance?
c om
At least Administrator 1 i c es ide
7. Where can MaxMan be downloaded from? - s erv t Gu
c s o den
FS System Portal p ra Stu
8. What is the purpose of creating a Managed n o@List of is
thsystems in MaxMan?
u f i e
Creates a saved list of FS1 and/or
f errAxiom t o us systems to monitor to save you time when
600
accessing monitoring information l
ue envia seMaxMan
i g
9. What two choices do
o (myou ehavelic for Monitored Events when setting up Event Notification?
By severityru fin category l
ab or by category then severity.
r then
e update f e r
10. Where l Fare a n s packages available for download?
g e r
-t Support (MOS)
u My Oracle
M i On n o n

1. Where can the FSCLI utility be accessed?
The FS system Portal
2. What operating systems are supported for FSCLI?
Windows, Solaris, Linux, MAC OS/X, Citrix, HPUX, and AIX
3. What is the FSCLI command line for displaying the FSCLI commands?
fscli
4. Explain what the following command sequence does:
Logs the user in to an FS system via a Pilot and then creates an event log listing saving
it to a text file

Lesson 7 - Review Questions
5. What does topology do?
Topology monitors and performs diagnostics on the topology of the back-end SAS
interconnects.
6. How do you access topology?
Via the fscli topology command

7. Describe what the following command does:
Returns the configuration information and statistics for the back-end SAS interconnects
and
d th
the results
lt off any di
diagnostic
ti ttestt th
thatt the
th system
t performed
f d
8. What does the fsstatsparser.exe command do?
Translates the binary statistics offloaded from an FS1-2 into a file
9. Where does the data that is analyzed by the FS Statistics Tools come from? s a
) ha
From a downloaded log bundle
c om
10 What
10. Wh t ddoes ththe fsstats
f t t formatter
f tt produced outt off the
th data
d t provided? es ide
idicd?
Comma-separated value files - s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

s a
) ha
c om
i c es ide
- s erv t Gu
c s o den
p ra Stu
f i n o@ this
r r u u s e
e l fe e to
m i gu cens
o ( e li
f i n a b l
u
rr sfer
F e
u e l
- t r an
Mig non

D89946GC10 SG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D89946GC10 SG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D89946GC10 SG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution prohibited Copyright 2016, Oracle and/or its affiliates

Restricted Rights Notice

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS

I Oracle Flash Storage System

Drive Loss Scenario: Rebuild/Copyback (4 of 5) 2-16

Modify Asset Information 3-35

Installing FSPM 4-16

Lesson Summary 4-61

Expansion Label Kit 5-39

Storage Domain: Auto-Tier Graphs 6-32

Downloading a New Version 6-76

System Statistics Process: Overview 7-29

FS1-2 Performance Model NVDIMM and DIMM Locations B-24

After completing this course, you should be able to do the

List the functions and features of Oracle Flash Storage System

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 2

Lesson 1: Overview Oracle Flash Storage System: Overview

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 3

This course does not cover the following topics:

Oracle Linux (including shell scripting)

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 4

Oracle Technology Network (OTN)

Release Notes (also available on MOS)

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 5

Objectives: You should be able to accomplish the objectives

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 6

Documentation: Indicates primary procedural or technical documentation

Additional resources: Indicates other references or links that provide

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 7

Caution: Indicates that damage to data, software, or the operating system

Hazard: Indicates a risk of personal injury from a nonelectrical hazard or a s a

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 8

Operating system commands are shown as in the following

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 9

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 10

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x I - 11

After completing this lesson, you should be able to:

Identify the Flash Storage System software components

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 2

Intelligent Flash Management

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 3

faults and failure scenarios).

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 4

RAS / Enterprise- Advanced Data Ease of

Controller Failover Time: Patented Quality of Service MaxMan: Multiple system

f i n o@ this FS Mobile: Mobile Monitoring

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 5

Policy-based Quality of Service:

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 6

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 7

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 8

An administrator The The Storage is

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 9

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 10

FS1 Controller 2U Drive Enclosure

2 HDD (24 per enclosure)

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 11

Oracle Linux (64-bit)

Oracle Flash Storage System: FS1 Administration for SAN R6.x 1 - 12